WO2022005361A1 - Quality-of-experience (qoe) reporting for ran-based qoe management - Google Patents

Quality-of-experience (qoe) reporting for ran-based qoe management Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022005361A1
WO2022005361A1 PCT/SE2021/050587 SE2021050587W WO2022005361A1 WO 2022005361 A1 WO2022005361 A1 WO 2022005361A1 SE 2021050587 W SE2021050587 W SE 2021050587W WO 2022005361 A1 WO2022005361 A1 WO 2022005361A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
qoe
cell
rnn
node
interface
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/SE2021/050587
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Ali PARICHEHREHTEROUJENI
Filip BARAC
Luca LUNARDI
Johan Rune
Cecilia EKLÖF
Original Assignee
Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ)
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) filed Critical Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ)
Publication of WO2022005361A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022005361A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0069Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink
    • H04W36/00695Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink using split of the control plane or user plane
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0069Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink
    • H04W36/00698Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink using different RATs
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/14Reselecting a network or an air interface
    • H04W36/144Reselecting a network or an air interface over a different radio air interface technology
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W92/00Interfaces specially adapted for wireless communication networks
    • H04W92/04Interfaces between hierarchically different network devices
    • H04W92/12Interfaces between hierarchically different network devices between access points and access point controllers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W92/00Interfaces specially adapted for wireless communication networks
    • H04W92/04Interfaces between hierarchically different network devices
    • H04W92/14Interfaces between hierarchically different network devices between access point controllers and backbone network device
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W92/00Interfaces specially adapted for wireless communication networks
    • H04W92/16Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices
    • H04W92/20Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices between access points

Definitions

  • QOE QUALITY-OF-EXPERIENCE
  • the present invention generally relates to wireless communication networks and particularly relates to measuring end-user experience in wireless networks, also referred to as quality of experience (QoE).
  • QoE quality of experience
  • LTE Long-Term Evolution
  • 4G fourth-generation
  • 3GPP Third-Generation Partnership Project
  • E-UTRAN Evolved UTRAN
  • SAE System Architecture Evolution
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core
  • E-UTRAN 100 includes one or more evolved Node B’s (eNB), such as eNBs 105, 110, and 115, and one or more user equipment (UE), such as UE 120.
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • UE user equipment
  • “user equipment” or “UE” means any wireless communication device (e.g., smartphone or computing device) that is capable of communicating with 3GPP-standard-compliant network equipment, including E-UTRAN as well as UTRAN and/or GERAN, as the third-generation (“3G”) and second-generation (“2G”) 3GPP RANs are commonly known.
  • 3G third-generation
  • 2G second-generation
  • E-UTRAN 100 is responsible for all radio-related functions in the network, including radio bearer control, radio admission control, radio mobility control, scheduling, and dynamic allocation of resources to UEs in uplink and downlink, as well as security of the communications with the UE.
  • These functions reside in the eNBs, such as eNBs 105, 110, and 115.
  • Each of the eNBs can serve a geographic coverage area including one more cells, including cells 106, 111, and 115 served by eNBs 105, 110, and 115, respectively.
  • the eNBs in the E-UTRAN communicate with each other via the X2 interface, as shown in Figure 1.
  • the eNBs also are responsible for the E-UTRAN interface to the EPC 130, specifically the SI interface to the Mobility Management Entity (MME) and the Serving Gateway (SGW), shown collectively as MME/S-GWs 134 and 138 in Figure 1.
  • MME/S-GW handles both the overall control of the UE and data flow between the UE and the rest of the EPC. More specifically, the MME processes the signaling (e.g., control plane) protocols between the UE and the EPC, which are known as the Non-Access Stratum (NAS) protocols.
  • NAS Non-Access Stratum
  • the S-GW handles all Internet Protocol (IP) data packets (e.g., data or user plane) between the UE and the EPC and serves as the local mobility anchor for the data bearers when the UE moves between eNBs, such as eNBs 105, 110, and 115.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • EPC 130 can also include aHome Subscriber Server (HSS) 131, which manages user- and subscriber-related information.
  • HSS 131 can also provide support functions in mobility management, call and session setup, user authentication and access authorization.
  • the functions of HSS 131 can be related to the functions of legacy Home Location Register (HLR) and Authentication Centre (AuC) functions or operations.
  • HSS 131 can also communicate with MMEs 134 and 138 via respective S6a interfaces.
  • HSS 131 can communicate with a user data repository (UDR) - labelled EPC-UDR 135 in Figure 1 - via a Ud interface.
  • EPC-UDR 135 can store user credentials after they have been encrypted by AuC algorithms. These algorithms are not standardized (i.e., vendor-specific), such that encrypted credentials stored in EPC-UDR 135 are inaccessible by any other vendor than the vendor of HSS 131.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates an exemplary control plane (CP) protocol stack between a UE, the E- UTRAN (e.g., an eNB), and the EPC (e.g., an MME).
  • the exemplary protocol stack includes Physical (PHY), Medium Access Control (MAC), Radio Link Control (RLC), Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP), and Radio Resource Control (RRC) layers between the UE and eNB.
  • the PHY layer is concerned with how and what characteristics are used to transfer data over transport channels on the LTE radio interface.
  • the MAC layer provides data transfer services on logical channels, maps logical channels to PHY transport channels, and reallocates PHY resources to support these services.
  • the RLC layer provides error detection and/or correction, concatenation, segmentation, and reassembly, reordering of data transferred to or from the upper layers.
  • the PDCP layer provides ciphering/deciphering and integrity protection for both CP and user plane (UP), as well as other UP functions such as header compression.
  • the exemplary protocol stack also includes non-access stratum (NAS) signaling between the UE and the MME.
  • NAS non-access stratum
  • the RRC layer controls communications between a UE and an eNB at the radio interface, as well as the mobility of a UE between cells in the E-UTRAN.
  • a UE After a UE is powered ON it will be in the RRC IDLE state until an RRC connection is established with the network, at which time the UE will transition to RRC_CONNECTED state (e.g. where data transfer can occur).
  • the UE returns to RRCJEDLE after the connection with the network is released.
  • RRC_ IDLE state the UE does not belong to any cell, no RRC context has been established for the UE (e.g., in E- UTRAN), and the UE is out of UL synchronization with the network.
  • a UE in RRC_IDLE state is known in the EPC and has an assigned IP address. Furthermore, in RRC IDLE state, the UE ’ s radio is active on a discontinuous reception (DRX) schedule configured by upper layers.
  • DRX active periods also referred to as “DRX On durations”
  • SI system information
  • an RRCJEDLE UE receives system information (SI) broadcast by a serving ceil, performs measurements of neighbor cells to support cell reseiection, and monitors a paging channel for pages from the EPC via an eNB serving the cell in which the UE is camping.
  • SI system information
  • a UE must perform a random-access (RA) procedure to move from RRC IDLE to RRC CONNECTED state.
  • RRC CONNECTED state the cell serving the UE is known and an RRC context is established for the UE in the serving eNB, such that the UE and eNB can communicate.
  • a Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI) - a UE identity used for signaling between UE and network - is configured for a UE in RRC CONNECTED state.
  • C-RNTI Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • Logical channel communications between a UE and an eNB are via radio bearers. Since LTE Rel- 8, signaling radio bearers (SRBs) SRBO, SRBl, and SRB2 have been available for the transport of RRC and NAS messages. SRBO is used for RRC connection setup, RRC connection resume, and RRC connection re-establishment. Once any of these operations has succeeded, SRBl is used for handling RRC messages (which may include a piggybacked NAS message) and for NAS messages prior to establishment of SRB2. SRB2 is used for NAS messages and lower- priority RRC messages (e.g., logged measurement information). SRBO and SRBl are also used for establishment and modification of data radio bearers (DRBs) for carrying user data between the UE and eNB.
  • DRBs data radio bearers
  • 3GPP Rel- 10 supports bandwidths larger than 20 MHz.
  • One important Rel- 10 requirement is backward compatibility with Rel-8.
  • a wideband LTE Rel-10 carrier e.g., >20 MHz
  • CCs component carriers
  • Legacy terminals can be scheduled in all parts of the wideband Rel-10 carrier.
  • CA Carrier Aggregation
  • LTE dual connectivity was introduced in Rel- 12.
  • DC LTE dual connectivity
  • a UE in RRC CONNECTED state consumes radio resources provided by at least two different network points connected to one another with anon-ideal backhaul.
  • these two network points may be referred to as a “Master eNB” (MeNB) and a “Secondary eNB” (SeNB).
  • MN Master eNB
  • SeNB Secondary eNB
  • SN secondary node
  • SeNB can be used interchangeably.
  • DC can be viewed as a special case of CA, in which the aggregated carriers (or cells) are provided by network nodes that are physically separated and not connected via a robust, high-capacity connection.
  • the UE is configured with a Master Cell Group (MCG) associated with the MN and a Secondary Cell Group (SCG) associated with the SN.
  • MCG Master Cell Group
  • SCG Secondary Cell Group
  • Each of the CGs is a group of serving cells that includes one MAC entity, a set of logical channels with associated RLC entities, a primary cell (PCell), and optionally one or more secondary cells (SCells).
  • the term “Special Cell” refers to the PCell of the MCG or the PSCell of the SCG depending on whether the UE’s MAC entity is associated with the MCG or the SCG, respectively.
  • non-DC operation e.g., CA
  • SpCell refers to the PCell.
  • An SpCell is always activated and supports physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) transmission and contention-based random access by UEs.
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • the MN provides system information (SI) and terminates the control plane connection towards the UE and, as such, is the controlling node of the UE, including handovers to and from SNs. For example, the MN terminates the connection between the eNB and the Mobility Management Entity (MME) for the UE.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • An SN provides additional radio resources (e.g., bearers) for radio resource bearers include MCG bearers, SCG bearers, and split bearers that have resources from both MCG and SCG.
  • the reconfiguration, addition, and removal of SCells can be performed by RRC. When adding a new SCell, dedicated RRC signaling is used to send the UE all required SI of the SCell, such that UEs need not acquire SI directly from the SCell broadcast. It is also possible to support CA in either or both of MCG and SCG. In other words, either or both of the MCG and the SCG can include multiple cells working in CA.
  • QoE measurements have been specified for UEs operating in LTE networks and in earlier-generation UMTS networks. Measurements in both networks operate according to the same high-level principles. Their purpose is to measure the experience of end users when using certain applications over a network. For example, QoE measurements for streaming services and for MTSI (Mobility Telephony Service for IMS) are supported in LTE.
  • QoE measurements for streaming services and for MTSI Mobility Telephony Service for IMS
  • RRC signaling is used to configure application layer measurements in UEs and to collect QoE measurement result files from the configured UEs.
  • application layer measurement configuration from the core network e.g., EPC
  • OAM network operations/ administration/maintenance
  • TCE Trace Collector Entity
  • MCE Measurement Collection Entity
  • 5G fifth generation
  • NR New Radio
  • 3GPP Third-Generation Partnership Project
  • eMBB enhanced mobile broadband
  • MTC machine type communications
  • URLLC ultra-reliable low latency communications
  • D2D side-link device-to-device
  • 5G/NR technology shares many similarities with fourth-generation LTE.
  • both PHYs utilize similar arrangements of time-domain physical resources into 1-ms subframes that include multiple slots of equal duration, with each slot including multiple OFDM-based symbols.
  • NR RRC layer includes RRC IDLE and RRC CONNECTED states, but adds another state known as RRC INACTIVE.
  • RRC INACTIVE another state known as RRC INACTIVE.
  • NR networks also provide coverage via “beams.”
  • a DL “beam” is a coverage area of a network-transmitted RS that may be measured or monitored by a UE.
  • DC is also envisioned as an important feature for 5 G/NR networks.
  • DC (or more generally, multi-connectivity) scenarios have been considered for NR. These include NR-DC that is similar to LTE-DC discussed above, except that both the MN and SN (referred to as “gNBs”) employ the NR interface to communicate with the UE.
  • gNBs both the MN and SN
  • MR-DC multi-RAT DC
  • One node acts as the MN (e.g., providing MCG) and the other as the SN (e.g., providing SCG), with the MN and SN being connected via a network interface and at least the MN being connected to a core network (e.g., EPC or 5GC).
  • MN providing MCG
  • SN e.g., providing SCG
  • a core network e.g., EPC or 5GC
  • QoE measurements will also be needed for UEs operating in NR networks, including in MR-DC operation.
  • the existing framework for QoE measurements does not address the various options and/or complexities of a UE’s connectivity with networks that include both LTE and NR.
  • the existing framework does not provide the level of granularity and/or control for QoE measurements in these networks. Solutions to these problems, issues, and/or difficulties are needed.
  • Embodiments of the present disclosure provide specific improvements to QoE measurements in a wireless network, such as by facilitating solutions to overcome exemplary problems summarized above and described in more detail below.
  • Embodiments of the present disclosure include methods (e.g., procedures) for handling quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network. These exemplary methods can be performed by a first radio access network node (RNN, e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc. , or component thereoi) in the wireless network (e.g., E-UTRAN, NG-RAN).
  • RNN radio access network node
  • These exemplary methods can include receiving, from a UE via a first cell, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a second cell. These exemplary methods can also include determining that the second cell is served by a second RNN. These exemplary methods can also include, based on determining that the second cell is served by the second RNN, forwarding the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
  • the first cell uses a first radio access technology (RAT) and one of the following applies: the second cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT, or the second cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE.
  • RAT radio access technology
  • the QoE measurement report also includes further application-layer QoE measurements associated with the first cell.
  • the application-layer QoE measurements are associated with the second cell and the first cell.
  • the first RNN is a centralized unit (CU) of a base station
  • the second RNN is a distributed unit (DU) of the base station
  • the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an intra-base station interface between the CU and the DU.
  • the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface.
  • the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
  • the first RNN is one of a master node (MN) or a secondary node (SN) in dual connectivity (DC) with the UE, and the second RNN is the other of the MN and the SN.
  • the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN.
  • the inter-base station interface can be an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
  • the first RNN is a first CU of one of an MN and an SN in DC with the UE
  • the second RNN is a second DU of the other of the MN and SN.
  • the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU.
  • the inter-base station interface can be an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
  • these exemplary methods can also include determining whether there is a direct inter-base station interface between the first and second RNNs.
  • the forwarding operation can include, based on determining that there is no direct inter-base station interface between the first RNN and the second RNN, sending the QoE measurement report to a core network (CN) node connected to the first RNN for forwarding to the second RNN.
  • the QoE measurement report is sent to the CN node in a request to enable modifications of resources for an established protocol data unit (PDU) session for the UE.
  • PDU protocol data unit
  • the CN node is an access and mobility management function (AMF) and the QoE measurement report is forwarded to the AMF via an NG interface.
  • the CN node is a mobility management entity (MME) and the QoE measurement report is forwarded to the MME via an SI interface.
  • Other embodiments include additional methods (e.g., procedures) for handling QoE measurements by UEs in a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure. These exemplary methods can be performed by a second RNN (e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc. , or component thereof) in the wireless network (e.g, E-UTRAN, NG-RAN).
  • a second RNN e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc.
  • These exemplary methods can include receiving, from a UE via a first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell served by the second RNN. These exemplary methods can also include, based on the QoE measurement report, adapting resource allocation associated with at least one of the cell and the UE. In some embodiments, adapting the resource allocation can be further based on radio link measurements, for the cell, that are received by the second RNN from UEs served by the cell.
  • the first cell uses a first RAT and one of the following applies: the second cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT, or the second cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE.
  • the QoE measurement report also includes further application-layer QoE measurements associated with the first cell.
  • the application-layer QoE measurements are associated with the second cell and the first cell.
  • the first RNN is a CU of a base station
  • the second RNN is a DU of the base station
  • the QoE measurement report is received via an intra-base station interface between the CU and the DU.
  • the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface.
  • the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
  • the first RNN is one of an MN or an SN in DC with the UE
  • the second RNN is the other of the MN and the SN.
  • the QoE measurement report is received via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN.
  • the inter-base station interface can be an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
  • the first RNN is a first CU of one of an MN and an SN in DC with the UE
  • the second RNN is a second DU of the other of the MN and SN.
  • the QoE measurement report is received via an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU, and via an intra-base station interface between the second CU and the second DU.
  • the inter-base station interface is an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
  • the intra-base station interface is an FI interface or a W1 interface.
  • the QoE measurement report is received via a first interface between the first RNN and a first CN node and via a second interface between the second RNN and either the first CN node or a second CN node.
  • the first and second CN nodes are first and second AMFs, and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces.
  • the first and second CN nodes are first and second MMEs, and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces.
  • the first and second CN nodes are the same (e.g., a single CN node, such as an AMF).
  • the second interface is between the second RNN and the first CN node.
  • the first and second CN nodes are different, the second interface is between the second RNN and the second CN node, and the QoE measurement report is also received via a third interface between the first and second CN nodes.
  • the second RNN is a CU of a base station and the QoE measurement report is received by a control plane component of the CU (CU-CP).
  • adapting the resource allocation can include extracting, from the QoE measurement report, information related to one of the following associated with the UE: a PDU session, a bearer, and a data flow; and based on the extracted information, sending to a user plane component of the CU (CU-UP) a request to perform one or more of the following operations:
  • exemplary methods for handling quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network.
  • QoE quality of experience
  • UEs user equipment
  • a CN node e.g., MME, AMF, etc.
  • RAN radio access network
  • These exemplary methods can include receiving, from a UE via a first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell serving the UE. These exemplary methods can also include determining that the cell is served by a second RNN. These exemplary methods can also include, based on determining that the cell is served by the second RNN, sending the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
  • the first RNN uses a first RAT and one of the following applies: the cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT, or the cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE. In some embodiments, determining that the cell is served by the second RNN is based on one of the following associated with the QoE measurement report: an identifier of the cell, an identifier of the second RNN, or an IP address of the second RNN.
  • the QoE measurement report is received via a first interface between the first RNN and the CN node, and the QoE measurement report is sent via a second interface between the second RNN and the CN node.
  • the CN node is an AMF and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces.
  • the CN node is an MME and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces.
  • these exemplary methods can also include determining whether the second RNN is connected to at least one of the CN node and a second CN node.
  • the QoE measurement report is sent to the second RNN via a third interface between the CN node and the second CN node based on determining that the second RNN is connected to the second CN node but not to the CN node.
  • the CN node and the second CN node are AMFs and the third interface is an N14 interface.
  • one of the CN node and the second CN node is an AMF
  • the other of the CN node and the second CN node is an MME
  • the third interface is an N26 interface.
  • exemplary methods for performing quality of experience (QoE) measurements in a wireless network.
  • QoE quality of experience
  • a UE e.g., wireless device, IoT device, etc.
  • These exemplary methods can include, while operating in a first cell of the wireless network that uses a first RAT, initiating QoE measurements for one or more services provided by the UE application layer. These exemplary methods can also include subsequently performing one or more mobility procedures towards other cells of the wireless network.
  • the one or more mobility operations include at least one of the following:
  • These exemplary methods can also include sending, to the wireless network, one or more QoE measurement reports including QoE measurements performed by the UE in at least the first cell.
  • the one or more mobility procedures comprise a handover from the first cell to a second cell uses the different RAT and the one or more QoE measurement reports include a single QoE measurement report sent via the second cell.
  • the exemplary method can also include one of the following: continuing the QoE measurements in the second cell, wherein the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed in the first cell and the second cell; or stopping the QoE measurements in the second cell, wherein the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed only in the first cell.
  • the one or more mobility procedures comprise a first handover from the first cell to a third cell that uses the different RAT, and a second handover from the third cell to a second cell that uses the first RAT.
  • the one or more QoE measurement reports comprise a single QoE measurement report sent via the second cell.
  • these exemplary methods can also include one of the following: continuing the QoE measurements in the third cell, wherein the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed in the first cell and the third cell; or stopping the QoE measurements in the third cell, wherein the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed only in the first cell.
  • the one or more mobility procedures comprise addition of connectivity to the wireless network via a second cell served by a different network node than the first cell.
  • the second cell can either use the first RAT or the different RAT.
  • communication of data for the one or more services is according to one of the following: via the second cell only, non-overlapping portions of the data via the first and second cells, or duplicated via both the first and second cells.
  • these exemplary methods can also include continuing the QoE measurements in the second cell.
  • the one or more QoE measurement reports include one of the following:
  • first and second QoE measurement reports including the QoE measurements performed in the respective first and second cells and sent via the respective first and second cells;
  • each QoE measurement report including the QoE measurements performed in both the first and second cells.
  • the exemplary method can also include stopping the QoE measurements in the second cell.
  • the one or more QoE measurement reports include a first QoE measurement report including measurements performed only in the first cell and sent via the first cell.
  • these exemplary methods can also include restarting the stopped QoE measurements in the second cell.
  • the one or more QoE measurement reports also include a second QoE measurement report including measurements performed only in the second cell and sent via the second cell.
  • first and second RNNs e.g., base stations, eNBs, gNBs, ng- eNBs, en-gNBs, CUs, DUs, etc., or components thereof
  • CN nodes e.g., MMEs, AMFs, etc.
  • UEs e.g., wireless devices, IoT devices, etc.
  • Other embodiments include non-transitory, computer-readable media storing program instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry, configure such RNNs, CN nodes, and UEs to perform operations corresponding to any of the exemplary methods described herein.
  • FIG 1 is a high-level block diagram of an exemplary architecture of the Long-Term Evolution (LTE) Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN) and Evolved Packet Core (EPC) network, as standardized by 3 GPP.
  • LTE Long-Term Evolution
  • E-UTRAN Evolved UTRAN
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core
  • Figure 2 illustrates an exemplary control plane (CP) protocol stack between a UE, the E- UTRAN, and the EPC.
  • CP control plane
  • FIGS 3-4 illustrate various aspects of dual connectivity (DC) in an LTE network.
  • Figure 5 shows a high-level view of an exemplary 5G network architecture.
  • FIGS 6-7 show high-level views of exemplary network architectures that support multi- RAT DC (MR-DC) using EPC and 5G Core (5GC), respectively.
  • MR-DC multi- RAT DC
  • 5GC 5G Core
  • Figure 8 is a block diagram showing a high-level comparison of EN-DC, NE-DC, and NGEN-DC options.
  • Figure 9 illustrates an exemplary SN Addition procedure for MR-DC utilizing a 5GC.
  • Figure 10 illustrates an exemplary MN-initiated SN Release procedure for MR-DC utilizing a 5GC.
  • Figure 11-12 illustrate exemplary MN- and SN-initiated SN Change procedures, respectively, for MR-DC utilizing a 5GC.
  • Figures 13A-D show various procedures between a UTRAN and a UE for QoE measurements in a legacy UMTS network.
  • Figures 14A-C illustrate various aspects of QoE measurement configuration for a UE in an LTE network.
  • Figures 15A-C illustrate various aspects of QoE measurement collection for a UE in an LTE network.
  • Figure 16 shows a more detailed signal flow of activation of QoE measurement collection and reporting of collected information for a UE in an LTE network.
  • Figures 17-21 show exemplary signal flow diagrams of various procedures for handling QoE measurements reports in a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 22 is a flow diagram of an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for a first RAN node (RNN, e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc., or component thereol), according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • RNN e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc., or component thereol
  • Figure 23 is a flow diagram of an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for a second RNN (e.g, base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc., or component thereol), according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • a second RNN e.g, base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc., or component thereol
  • Figure 24 illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 25 illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a UE, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 26 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary virtualization environment usable for implementation of various embodiments of network nodes described herein.
  • Figures 27-28 are block diagrams of various exemplary communication systems and/or networks, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • Figures 29-32 are flow diagrams of exemplary methods for transmission and/or reception of user data, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 33 is a flow diagram of an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for a core network node (e.g., MME, AMF, etc.), according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • a core network node e.g., MME, AMF, etc.
  • Figure 34 is a flow diagram of an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for a UE (e.g., wireless device, IoT device, etc.), according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • a UE e.g., wireless device, IoT device, etc.
  • Radio Node As used herein, a “radio node” can be either a “radio access node” or a “wireless device.”
  • Radio Access Node As used herein, a “radio access node” (or equivalently “radio network node,” “radio access network node,” or “RAN node”) can be any node in a radio access network (RAN) of a cellular communications network that operates to wirelessly transmit and/or receive signals.
  • RAN radio access network
  • a radio access node examples include, but are not limited to, a base station (e.g ., a New Radio (NR) base station (gNB/en-gNB) in a 3GPP Fifth Generation (5G) NR network or an enhanced or evolved Node B (eNB/ng-eNB) in a 3GPP LTE network), base station distributed components (e.g., CU and DU), base station control- and/or user-plane components (e.g., CU-CP, CU-UP), ahigh-power or macro base station, a low-power base station (e.g., micro, pico, femto, or home base station, or the like), an integrated access backhaul (IAB) node, a transmission point, a remote radio unit (RRU or RRH), and a relay node.
  • a base station e.g ., a New Radio (NR) base station (gNB/en-gNB) in a 3GPP Fifth Generation (5G) NR
  • a “core network node” is any type of node in a core network.
  • Some examples of a core network node include, e.g., a Mobility Management Entity (MME), a serving gateway (SGW), a Packet Data Network Gateway (P-GW), an access and mobility management function (AMF), a session management function (AMF), a user plane function (UPF), a Service Capability Exposure Function (SCEF), or the like.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • SGW serving gateway
  • P-GW Packet Data Network Gateway
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • AMF AMF
  • UPF user plane function
  • SCEF Service Capability Exposure Function
  • Wireless Device As used herein, a “wireless device” (or “WD” for short) is any type of device that has access to (i.e., is served by) a cellular communications network by communicate wirelessly with network nodes and/or other wireless devices. Communicating wirelessly can involve transmitting and/or receiving wireless signals using electromagnetic waves, radio waves, infrared waves, and/or other types of signals suitable for conveying information through air.
  • wireless device examples include, but are not limited to, smart phones, mobile phones, cell phones, voice over IP (VoIP) phones, wireless local loop phones, desktop computers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), wireless cameras, gaming consoles or devices, music storage devices, playback appliances, wearable devices, wireless endpoints, mobile stations, tablets, laptops, laptop- embedded equipment (LEE), laptop-mounted equipment (LME), smart devices, wireless customer-premise equipment (CPE), mobile-type communication (MTC) devices, Intemet-of-Things (IoT) devices, vehicle-mounted wireless terminal devices, etc.
  • the term “wireless device” is used interchangeably herein with the term “user equipment” (or “UE” for short).
  • Network Node is any node that is either part of the radio access network (e.g ., a radio access node or equivalent name discussed above) or of the core network (e.g., a core network node discussed above) of a cellular communications network.
  • a network node is equipment capable, configured, arranged, and/or operable to communicate directly or indirectly with a wireless device and/or with other network nodes or equipment in the cellular communications network, to enable and/or provide wireless access to the wireless device, and/or to perform other functions (e.g., administration) in the cellular communications network.
  • the existing framework for QoE measurements does not address the various options and/or complexities of a UE’s connectivity with networks that include both LTE and NR. Furthermore, the existing framework does not provide the level of granularity and/or control for QoE measurements in these networks. This is discussed in more detail below, after the following description of NR network architecture and various DC features and/or architectures.
  • Figure 3 shows an aggregated user plane (UP) protocol stack for LTE DC
  • Figure 4A shows the inter-eNB connectivity for LTE DC UP.
  • the UP aggregation shown in Figure 3 achieves benefits such as increasing the throughput for users with good channel conditions and the capability of receiving and transmitting at higher data rates than can be supported by a single node, even without a low-latency backhaul connection between MeNB/MN and SeNB/SN.
  • the LTE DC UP includes three different types of bearers.
  • MCG bearers are terminated in the MN, and the Sl-U connection for the corresponding bearer(s) to the S-GW is terminated in the MN (shown in Figure 4A).
  • the SN is not involved in the transport of UP data for MCG bearers.
  • SCG bearers are terminated in the SN, which can be directly connected with the S-GW via Sl-U (as shown in Figure 4A).
  • the MN is not involved in the transport of UP data for SCG bearers.
  • An Sl-U connection between S-GW and SN is only present if SCG bearers are configured.
  • split bearers are also terminated in the MN, with PDCP data being transferred between MN and SN via X2-U interface (shown in Figure 4A). Both SN and MN are involved in transmitting data for split bearers.
  • FIG. 4B shows the inter-eNB CP connectivity for LTE DC.
  • all MME signaling is carried over the MeNB’s Sl-MME interface to the MME, with the SeNB’s signaling also carried over the X2-C interface with the MeNB.
  • the network’s RRC connection with the UE is handled only by the MeNB, such that SRBs are always configured as MCG bearer type and only use radio resources of the MeNB.
  • the MeNB can also configure the UE based on input from the SeNB and, in this manner, the SeNB can indirectly control the UE.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates a high-level view of the 5G network architecture, consisting of a Next Generation RAN (NG-RAN) 599 and a 5G Core (5GC) 598.
  • NG-RAN 599 can include a set of gNodeB’s (gNBs) connected to the 5GC via one or more NG interfaces, such as gNBs 500, 550 connected via interfaces 502, 552, respectively.
  • the gNBs can be connected to each other via one or more Xn interfaces, such as Xn interface 540 between gNBs 500 and 550.
  • each of the gNBs can support frequency division duplexing (FDD), time division duplexing (TDD), or a combination thereof.
  • FDD frequency division duplexing
  • TDD time division duplexing
  • NG-RAN 599 is layered into a Radio Network Layer (RNL) and a Transport Network Layer (TNL).
  • RNL Radio Network Layer
  • TNL Transport Network Layer
  • the NG-RAN architecture i.e., the NG-RAN logical nodes and interfaces between them, is defined as part of the RNL.
  • NG, Xn, FI the related TNL protocol and the functionality are specified.
  • the TNL provides services for user plane transport and signaling transport.
  • each gNB is connected to all 5GC nodes within an “AMF Region,” which is defined in 3GPP TS 23.501. If security protection for CP and UP data on TNL of NG-RAN interfaces is supported, NDS/IP shall be applied.
  • the NG RAN logical nodes shown in Figure 5 include a central (or centralized) unit (CU or gNB-CU) and one or more distributed (or decentralized) units (DU or gNB-DU).
  • gNB 500 includes gNB-CU 510 and gNB-DUs 520 and 540.
  • CUs e.g, gNB-CU 510) are logical nodes that host higher-layer protocols and perform various gNB functions such controlling the operation of DUs.
  • Each DU is a logical node that hosts lower-layer protocols and can include, depending on the functional split, various subsets of the gNB functions.
  • each of the CUs and DUs can include various circuitry needed to perform their respective functions, including processing circuitry, transceiver circuitry (e.g., for communication), and power supply circuitry.
  • processing circuitry e.g., for communication
  • transceiver circuitry e.g., for communication
  • power supply circuitry e.g., for power supply circuitry.
  • central unit and centralized unit are used interchangeably herein, as are the terms “distributed unit” and “decentralized unit.”
  • a gNB-CU connects to gNB-DUs over respective FI logical interfaces, such as interfaces 522 and 532 shown in Figure 5.
  • the gNB-CU and connected gNB-DUs are only visible to other gNBs and the 5GC as a gNB. In other words, the FI interface is not visible beyond gNB-CU.
  • DC can be achieved by allowing a UE to connect to multiple DUs served by the same CU or by allowing a UE to connect to multiple DUs served by different CUs.
  • a gNB-CU can also be separated into a CU-CP function (including RRC and PDCP for signaling radio bearers) and CU-UP function (including PDCP for user plane), with the El open interface between (see 3GPP TS 38.463).
  • the CU-CP and CU-UP parts communicate with each other using the El-AP protocol over the El interface.
  • Three deployment scenarios for the split gNB architecture shown in Figure 2 are defined in 3GPP TR 38.806:
  • DC is also envisioned as an important feature for 5G/NR networks.
  • 3GPP TR 38.804 (v 14.0.0) describes various exemplary dual-connectivity (DC) scenarios or configurations in which the MN and SN can apply either NR RAT, LTE RAT, or both, and can connect to either EPC or 5GC.
  • DC dual-connectivity
  • LTE DC i.e., both MN and SN employ LTE, as discussed above);
  • EN-DC LTE-NR DC where MN (eNB) employs LTE and SN (gNB) employs NR, and both are connected to EPC.
  • MN eNB
  • gNB SN
  • EPC EPC
  • NGEN-DC LTE-NR dual connectivity where a UE is connected to one ng-eNB that acts as a MN and one gNB that acts as a SN.
  • the ng-eNB is connected to the 5GC and the gNB is connected to the ng-eNB via the Xn interface.
  • NE-DC LTE-NR dual connectivity where a UE is connected to one gNB that acts as a MN and one ng-eNB that acts as a SN.
  • the gNB is connected to 5GC and the ng-eNB is connected to the gNB via the Xn interface.
  • NR-DC both MN and SN employ NR and connect to 5GC via NG.
  • MR-DC multi-RAT DC
  • a multiple Rx/Tx UE may be configured to utilize resources provided by two different nodes connected via non-ideal backhaul, one providing E-UTRA access and the other one providing NR access.
  • One node acts as the MN and the other as the SN, with one using LTE and the other using NR.
  • the MN and SN are connected via a network interface and at least the MN is connected to the core network.
  • EN-DC, NE-DC, and NGEN-DC are different example cases of MR-DC.
  • Figure 6 shows a high-level view of an exemplary network architecture that supports EN- DC, including an E-UTRAN 699 and an EPC 698.
  • E-UTRAN 699 can include en-gNBs 610 (e.g., 610a, b) and eNBs 620 (e.g, 620a, b) that are interconnected with each other via respective X2 (or X2-U) interfaces.
  • the eNBs 620 can be similar to those shown in Figure 1, while the ng-eNBs can be similar to the gNBs shown in Figure 5 except that they connect to EPC 698 via an S 1 -U interface rather than to a 5GC via an X2 interface.
  • the eNBs also connect to EPC 698 via an SI interface, similar to the arrangement shown in Figure 1. More specifically, en-gNBs 610 (e.g., 610a, b) and eNBs 620 (e.g, 620a, b) connect to MMEs (e.g, MMEs 630a, b) and S-GWs (e.g., S-GWs 640a, b) in EPC 698.
  • MMEs e.g, MMEs 630a, b
  • S-GWs e.g., S-GWs 640a, b
  • Each of the en-gNBs and eNBs can serve a geographic coverage area including one more cells, including cells 611a-b and 621a-b shown as exemplary in Figure 6.
  • a UE 605 can communicate with the en-gNB or eNB serving that particular cell via the NR or LTE radio interface, respectively.
  • UE 605 can be in EN-DC connectivity with a first cell served by an eNB and a second cell served by an en-gNB, such as cells 620a and 610a shown in Figure 6.
  • Figure 7 shows a high-level view of an exemplary network architecture that supports MR- DC configurations based on a 5GC. More specifically, Figure 7 shows an NG-RAN 799 and a 5GC 798.
  • NG-RAN 799 can include gNBs 710 (e.g, 710a, b) and ng-eNBs 720 (e.g, 720a, b) that are interconnected with each other via respective Xn interfaces.
  • gNBs 710 e.g, 710a, b
  • ng-eNBs 720 e.g, 720a, b
  • the gNBs and ng-eNBs are also connected via the NG interfaces to 5GC 798, more specifically to the AMF (Access and Mobility Management Function) 730 (e.g, AMFs 730a, b) via respective NG-C interfaces and to the UPF (User Plane Function) 740 (e.g., UPFs 740a, b) via respective NG-U interfaces.
  • the AMFs 730a, b can communicate with one or more session management functions (SMFs, e.g., SMFs 750a, b) and network exposure functions (NEFs, e.g., NEFs 760a, b).
  • SMFs Ses, SMFs 750a, b
  • NEFs network exposure functions
  • Each of the gNBs 710 can be similar to those shown in Figure 5, while each of the ng- eNBs can be similar to the eNBs shown in Figure 1 except that they connect to 5GC 798 via an NG interface rather than to EPC via an SI interface.
  • Each of the gNBs and ng-eNBs can serve a geographic coverage area including one more cells, including cells 711a-b and 721a-b shown as exemplary in Figure 7.
  • the gNBs and ng-eNBs can also use various directional beams to provide coverage in the respective cells.
  • a UE 705 can communicate with the gNB or ng-eNB serving that particular cell via the NR or LTE radio interface, respectively.
  • UE 705 can be in MR-DC connectivity with a first cell served by an ng-eNB and a second cell served by a gNB, such as cells 720a and 710a shown in Figure 7.
  • FIG 8 is a block diagram showing a high-level comparison of the EN-DC, NE-DC, and NGEN-DC options briefly mentioned above.
  • EN-DC the NR en-gNB (SN) is operating in NSA mode and has no direct control-plane (CP) interface with the EPC. Rather, the en-gNB’s CP connection to the EPC is indirect via the X2 interface to the eNB (MN), which has a CP connection with the EPC via Sl-C interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface).
  • MN eNB
  • Both the eNB and the en-gNB have UP connections with the EPC via Sl-U interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface).
  • the LTE ng-eNB In NE-DC (B), the LTE ng-eNB (SN) has no direct control-plane (CP) interface with the 5GC. Rather, the ng-eNB’s CP connection to the 5GC is indirect via the Xn interface to the gNB (MN), which has a CP connection with the 5GC via the NG-C interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface). Both the gNB and the ng-eNB have UP connections with the 5GC via NG-U interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface).
  • MN gNB
  • Both the gNB and the ng-eNB have UP connections with the 5GC via NG-U interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface).
  • the NR gNB In NGEN-DC (C), the NR gNB (SN) has no direct control-plane (CP) interface with the 5GC. Rather, the gNB’s CP connection to the 5GC is indirect via the Xn interface to the ng-eNB (MN), which has a CP connection with the 5GC via NG-C interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface). Both the gNB and the ng-eNB have UP connections with the 5GC via NG-U interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface).
  • MN ng-eNB
  • Both the gNB and the ng-eNB have UP connections with the 5GC via NG-U interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface).
  • the RRC layer controls other mobility procedures related to DC, including SN Modification, SN Addition, SN Release, and SN Change.
  • the MN or SN can initiate an SN Modification procedure to perform configuration changes of the SCG within the SN (“intra- SN”), e.g., modification/release of UP resource configuration and PSCell changes.
  • intra- SN configuration changes of the SCG within the SN
  • PSCell changes once a better cell in the same frequency as the UE’s current PSCell triggers an event, a UE measurement report and preparation of the target SN is needed before the RRCMeasurement configuration to execute addition/modification can be sent to the UE.
  • FIGS 9-12 illustrate various procedures related to multi-connectivity for a UE. These procedures include various messages exchanged between UE, MN, SN, and other network nodes. Although the following description uses specific names for these messages, these names are intended to be exemplary rather than definitive.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates an exemplary SN Addition procedure for MR-DC cases utilizing a 5GC. As shown in Figure 9, the procedure involves a UE (910), a MN (920), an SN (930), a user plane function (UPF, 940), and an access and mobility management function (AMF, 950). The UPF and AMF are functions in the 5GC.
  • the SN Addition procedure shown in Figure 9 is initiated by the MN and is used to establish a UE context at the SN to facilitate the SN providing radio resources to the UE. For bearers requiring SCG radio resources, this procedure can be used to add at least the initial SCG serving cell of the SCG. This procedure can also be used to configure an SN-terminated MCG bearer (where no SCG configuration is needed).
  • the operations shown in Figure 9 are labelled numerically, but this numbering is used to facilitate the following description rather than to imply or require a particular order unless expressly stated otherwise. Dashed lines indicate optional operations that may depend on one or more conditions.
  • the MN sends an SN Addition Request message to request the target SN to allocate radio resources for one or more specific PDU Sessions/QoS Flows, indicating QoS Flows characteristics (QoS Flow Level QoS parameters, PDU session level transport network layer (TNL) address information, and PDU session level Network Slice info).
  • the TNL address information can include a GPRS Tunneling Protocol (GTP) Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (TEID) and a TNL Internet Protocol (IP) address, such as defined in 3GPP TS 38.423 (vl6.1.0).
  • GTP GPRS Tunneling Protocol
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • This TNL address information generally identifies a “tunnel.” Accordingly, in the following description, the terms “tunnel information,” “tunnel identifier(s),” and “TNL address information” are used interchangeably.
  • MN indicates the requested SCG configuration information, including the entire UE capabilities and the UE capability coordination result.
  • the MN also provides the latest measurement results for the SN to use when choosing and configuring the SCG cell(s).
  • the MN can also request the SN to allocate radio resources for split SRB operation.
  • the MN can also provide the needed security information to the SN (e.g., even if no SN-terminated bearers are setup) to enable SRB3 to be setup based on SN decision.
  • MN can also provide Xn-U TNL address information, e.g., Xn-U DL TNL address information for SN- terminated bearers and Xn-U UL TNL address information for MN terminated bearers.
  • the SN may reject the request.
  • the RRM entity in the SN if it is able to admit the resource request, it allocates respective radio resources and, dependent on the bearer type options, respective transport network resources. For bearers requiring SCG radio resources the SN triggers UE Random Access so that synchronization of the SN radio resource configuration can be performed. The SN decides the PScell and other SCG SCells and provides the new SCG radio resource configuration to the MN in a SN RRC configuration message contained in the SN Addition Request Acknowledge message.
  • the SN In case of bearer options that require Xn-U resources between the MN and the SN, the SN provides Xn-U TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, Xn-U UL TNL address information for SN-terminated bearers, Xn-U DL TNL address information for MN terminated bearers. For SN-terminated bearers, the SN provides the NG-U DL TNL address information for the respective PDU Session and security algorithm. If SCG radio resources have been requested, the SCG radio resource configuration is provided.
  • the MN sends an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to the UE including the SN RRC configuration message, preferably without modifying it.
  • the UE applies the new configuration and replies to MN with an RRCConnectionReconfiguration complete message, including a SN RRC response message for SN, if needed.
  • the MN informs the SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully via SN Reconfiguration Complete message, including the encoded SN RRC response message, if received from the UE.
  • the UE performs random access (RA) towards the PSCell configured by the SN.
  • RA random access
  • the order the UE sends the MN RRC reconfiguration complete message and performs RA towards the SCG is not defined.
  • a successful RA towards the SCG is not required for a successful completion of the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure.
  • the MN sends SN Status Transfer to the SN.
  • the MN may take actions to minimize service interruption due to activation of MR-DC (Data forwarding).
  • MR-DC Data forwarding
  • the MN provides the list of the UE’s QoS flows/bearers that it wants to be handled by the SN (e.g, either as SN-terminated flows or MN-terminated bearers) in the PDU session resources to be added List IE (Information element), along with the PDU Session Resource Setup Info SN terminated and PDU Session Resource Setup Info MN terminated IEs that are part of it. Exemplary contents of these IEs are shown respectively in Tables 1-3 below. Table 1. PDU session resources to be added list.
  • List IE Information element
  • the MN provides a list of the QoS flows that it wants the SN to setup (i.e., SN-terminated) and also provides an “Offered GBR QoS Flow information which is an indication to the SN that it can add this flow as part of a split bearer and how many resources the MN is willing to provide for this flow (whereas it is up to the SN whether or not to use the indicated resources).
  • the UL NG-U UP TNL Information at UP FIE is sent also to the SN to provide the tunnel information for sending the UL data to the core network.
  • the MN provides a list of QoS flows to the SN, which can decide how many radio resources (e.g., DRBs) to establish to serve these QoS flows.
  • the MN doesn’t know in advance how many bearers the SN will group the QoS flow into. For example, there can be 10 QoS flows in the list, and the SN can decide to have just two bearers, each aggregating 5 QoS flows.
  • the tunnel information is not provided in the PDU Session Resource Setup Info SN terminated IE, since when sending the SN Addition Request, the MN does not know how many DRBs the SN will establish and therefore it does not know how many tunnels are required.
  • the MN can provide a list of the bearers that it wants SN to setup, but only for MN terminated bearers (i.e., MCG split bearer).
  • the MN can also provide the MN UL PDCP UP TNL Information for each bearer, which is the tunnel information to be used by the SN to forward UL data of MCG split bearers towards the MN.
  • the information in the PDU Session Resource Setup Info MN terminated IE is at the bearer level. This is because, in this case, the MN decides how many DRBs to establish for serving the QoS flows. Therefore, it can directly provide the uplink tunnel information in the SN Addition Request message that can be used to establish the required tunnels.
  • the SN can provide the list of the QoS flows/bearers that it has admitted (either as SCG bearers, SCG split bearers or MCG split bearers) in the PDU session resources admitted to be added List IE (shown below in Table 4), along with the PDU Session Resource Setup Response Info SN terminated and PDU Session Resource Setup Response Info MN terminated IES that are part of it (shown respectively in Tables 5-6 below).
  • the SN In the PDU Session Resource Setup Response Info SN terminated IE, the SN provides a list of the QoS flows that has admitted (grouped in the bearers that it has associated them with). If the SN has used the resources, if any, indicated by the MN (as provided in the Offered GBR QoS Flow information as discussed above), the SN indicates the amount of resources that the MN should provide in MCG requested GBR QoS Flow Information. This amount should be less than or equal to the Offered GBR QoS Flow information).
  • the NG-U DL UP TNL Information at NG- RAN IE provides the tunnel information for sending the DL data from the core network.
  • This information can be further forwarded from the MN to the CN later, so that both the tunnel end points are properly set for that PDU session in both the UL and DL directions.
  • the SN provides a list of the bearers that it has admitted (i.e., MCG split bearers) along with the S-Node DL SCO UP TNL Information, which is the tunnel information that the MN has to use to send data of MCG split bearers in the DL. Table 4. PDU session resources Admitted to be added list.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates an exemplary MN-initiated SN Release procedure for MR-DC cases utilizing a 5GC.
  • the procedure involves a UE (910), a MN (920), an SN (930), a user plane function (UPF, 940), and an access and mobility management function (AMF, 950).
  • Each of these entities can correspond to an identically numbered entity in Figure 9.
  • the operations shown in Figure 10 are labelled numerically, but this numbering is used to facilitate the following description rather than to imply or require a particular order unless expressly stated otherwise. Dashed lines indicate optional operations that may depend on one or more conditions.
  • the MN initiates the procedure by sending the SN Release Request message to the SN. If data forwarding is requested, the MN provides data forwarding addresses to the SN. In operation 2, the SN confirms SN Release by sending the SN Release Request Acknowledge message. Alternately, the SN may reject SN Release, e.g., if the SN change procedure is triggered by the SN. In operation 3, if needed, the MN indicates in an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message towards the UE that the UE shall release the entire SCG configuration. In case the UE is unable to comply with (part of) the configuration included in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message, it performs the reconfiguration failure procedure. Otherwise, in operation 4, the UE responds with an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message.
  • the SN sends an SN Status Transfer to the MN.
  • the SN forwards data received from the UPF to the MN.
  • a PDU Session Path Update procedure is performed among the MN, SN, UPF, and AMF.
  • the MN sends a UE context release message to the SN. Upon reception of this message, the SN can release radio- and CP-related resource associated with the UE context. Any ongoing data forwarding may continue, as needed.
  • An SN Change procedure can be used to transfer a UE context from the source SN to a target SN and to change the SCG configuration in UE from the source SN to the target SN.
  • the SN Change procedure can be MN-initiated or SN-initiated, but either case involves signaling over MCG SRB towards the UE.
  • Figure 11 illustrates an exemplary MN-initiated SN Change procedure for MR-DC scenarios utilizing a 5GC network. As shown in Figure 11, the procedure involves a UE (1110), aMN (1120), a source SN (S-SN, 1130), a target SN (T-SN, 1135), a UPF (1140), and an AMF (1150).
  • the operations shown in Figure 11 are labelled numerically, but this numbering is used to facilitate the following description rather than to imply or require a particular order unless expressly stated otherwise. Dashed lines indicate optional operations that may depend on one or more conditions.
  • the MN initiates the SN change by invoking the SN Addition procedure, specifically by sending an SN Addition Request message requesting the target SN to allocate resources for the UE.
  • the MN may include measurement results related to the target SN. If data forwarding is needed, the target SN provides data forwarding addresses to the MN in the acknowledgement (operation 2).
  • the target SN can also include an indication of the full or delta RRC configuration.
  • the MN initiates the release of the source SN resources by sending an SN Release Request message, to the S-SN, that includes a Cause indicating SCG mobility. If data forwarding is needed, the MN provides data forwarding addresses to the source SN. If direct data forwarding is used for SN terminated bearers, the MN provides data forwarding addresses as received from the target SN to source SN. Reception of the SN Release Request message triggers the source SN to stop providing user data to the UE and, if applicable, to start data forwarding. In operation 3b, the source SN responds to the MN with an SN Release Request Acknowledge message.
  • the MN triggers the UE to apply the new configuration.
  • the MN indicates the new configuration to the UE in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including the target SN’s RRC configuration message.
  • the UE applies the new configuration and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message (operation 5) that includes the encoded SN RRC response message for the target SN, if needed.
  • the UE is unable to comply with (part of) the configuration included in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message, it performs the reconfiguration failure procedure.
  • the MN informs the target SN via SN Reconfiguration Complete message that includes the encoded RRC response message for the target SN, if received from the UE in operation 5.
  • the UE performs a random access procedure to synchronize with the target SN.
  • the source SN sends the SN Status Transfer message to the MN, which the MN forwards to the target SN.
  • forwarding of UP data from source SN to target SN occurs via the MN. It may be initiated as early as operation 3a when the source SN receives the SN Release Request message from the MN.
  • operation 10 if one of the PDU session/QoS Flow was terminated at the source SN, a PDU Session Path Update procedure is performed among the MN, T-SN, UPF, and AMF.
  • operation 11 the MN sends a UE Context Release message to the SN. Upon reception of this message, the SN can release radio- and CP-related resource associated with the UE context. Any ongoing data forwarding may continue, as needed.
  • Figure 12 illustrates an exemplary SN-initiated SN Change procedure for MR-DC scenarios utilizing a 5GC network. This procedure involves the same entities as shown in Figure 11.
  • the operations shown in Figure 12 are labelled numerically, but this numbering is used to facilitate the following description rather than to imply or require a particular order unless expressly stated otherwise. Dashed lines indicate optional operations that may depend on one or more conditions.
  • the source SN initiates the SN change procedure by sending the SN Change
  • This message includes a candidate target SN ID and may also include an SCG configuration (e.g ., to support delta configuration) and measurement results related to the target SN.
  • the MN sends an SN Addition Request message requesting the target SN to allocate resources for the UE.
  • the MN may include measurement results related to the target SN, e.g., as received from the source SN. If data forwarding is needed, the target SN provides data forwarding addresses to the MN in the acknowledgement (operation 3).
  • the target SN can also include an indication of the full or delta RRC configuration.
  • the MN triggers the UE to apply the new configuration.
  • the MN indicates the new configuration to the UE in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including the target SN’s RRC configuration message.
  • the UE applies the new configuration and sends an RRCConnectionReconflgurationComplete message (operation 5) that includes the encoded SN RRC response message for the target SN, if needed.
  • an RRCConnectionReconflgurationComplete message (operation 5) that includes the encoded SN RRC response message for the target SN, if needed.
  • the UE is unable to comply with (part ol) the configuration included in the MN RRC reconfiguration message, it performs the reconfiguration failure procedure.
  • the MN confirms the change to the source SN in an SN Change Confirm message.
  • the MN If data forwarding is needed, the MN provides data forwarding addresses to the source SN. If direct data forwarding is used for SN terminated bearers, the MN provides data forwarding addresses as received from the target SN. Reception of the SN Change Confirm message triggers the source SN to stop providing user data to the UE and, if applicable, to start data forwarding. Operations 7-12 in Figure 12 are substantially similar to operations 6-11 in Figure 11.
  • QoE Quality of Experience
  • MTSI Mobility Telephony Service for IMS
  • QoE measurements may be initiated towards the RAN from an O&M node generically for a group of UEs (e.g., all UEs meeting one or more criteria), or they may also be initiated from the CN to the RAN for a specific UE.
  • the configuration of the measurement includes the measurement details, which is encapsulated in a container that is transparent to RAN.
  • a "TRACE START" S1AP message is used by the LTE EPC for initiating QoE measurements by a specific UE.
  • This message carries details about the measurement configuration the application should collect in the “Container for application layer measurement configuration” IE, which transparent to the RAN.
  • This message also includes details needed to reach the TCE to which the measurements should be sent.
  • Figures 13A-D show various procedures between a UTRAN and a UE for QoE measurements in a legacy UMTS network.
  • the UTRAN can send a UE Capability Enquiry message to request the UE to report its application layer measurement capabilities.
  • the UE can provide its application layer measurement capabilities to the UTRAN via a UE Capability Information message, particularly in a “Measurement Capability” IE that includes information related to UE capability to perform the QoE measurement collection for streaming services and/or MTSI services.
  • Table 7 shows exemplary contents of this IE: Table 7.
  • the UTRAN can respond with a UE Capability Information Confirm message.
  • Figure 13C shows that the UTRAN can send a Measurement Control message containing “Application layer measurement configuration” IE in order to configure QoE measurement in the UE.
  • Table 8 below shows exemplary contents of this IE: Table 8.
  • Figure 13D shows that the UE can send QoE measurement results via UTRAN to the TCE using a Measurement Report message that includes an “Application layer measurement reporting” IE.
  • Table 9 below shows exemplary contents of this IE:
  • Figures 14A-C illustrate a procedure between an E-UTRAN and a UE for configuring QoE measurements in an LTE network.
  • Figure 14A shows an exemplary UE capability transfer procedure used to transfer UE radio access capability information from the UE to E-UTRAN.
  • the E-UTRAN can send a UECapabilityEnquiry message, similar to the arrangement shown in Figure 13 A.
  • the UE can respond with a UECapability Information message that includes a “UE-EUTRA-Capability” IE.
  • This IE may further include a UE-EUTRA-Capability-vl530 IE, which can be used to indicate whether the UE supports QoE Measurement Collection for streaming services and/or MTSI services.
  • the UE-EUTRA-Capability-vl530 IE can include a “measParameters-vl530” IE containing the information about the UE’s measurement support.
  • the “UE-EUTRA-Capability” IE can also include a “UE-EUTRA-Capability- vl6xy-IE”, which can include a “qoe-Extensions-rl6” field.
  • Figure 14B shows an exemplary ASN.l data structure for these various IEs, with the various fields defined in Table 10 below. Table 10.
  • Figure 14C shows an exemplary ASN.l data structure for the qoe-Reference parameter mentioned in Table 10 above.
  • Figures 15A-C illustrate various aspects of QoE measurement collection for a UE in an
  • FIG. 15A shows an exemplary signal flow diagram of a QoE measurement collection process for LTE.
  • the serving eNB sends to a UE in RRC CONNECTED state an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message that includes a QoE configuration file, e.g., a measConfigAppLayer IE within an OtherConfig IE.
  • the QoE configuration file is an application-layer measurement configuration received by the eNB (e.g., from EPC) encapsulated in a transparent container, which is forwarded to UE in the RRC message.
  • the UE responds with an RRCConnectionReconflgurationComplete message.
  • the UE performs the configured QoE measurements and sends a MeasReportAppLayer RRC message to the eNB, including a QoE measurement result file.
  • the eNB can forward this result file transparently (e.g., to EPC).
  • Figure 15B shows an exemplary ASN.l data structure for a measConfigAppLayer IE, including a measConfigAppLayerToAddModList-x ⁇ 6 and a measConfigAppLayerToRelease- List- rl6.
  • the former may be used to add or modify multiple QoE measurement configurations (up to maxQoE-Measurement-r 16), and the latter may be used to remove multiple QoE measurement configuration (up to maxQoE-Measurement-r 16) .
  • a value of “qoe” indicates Quality of Experience Measurement Collection for streaming services and a value of “qoemtsi” indicates Enhanced Quality of Experience Measurement Collection for MTSI. This field also includes various spare values.
  • the following procedural statements exemplify desired UE behavior upon reception of the a measConfigAppLayer IE in the OtherConfig IE within the RRCReconfiguration:
  • Figure 15C shows an exemplary ASN.l data structure for a meas Report AppLayer IE, by which a UE can send to the E-UTRAN (e.g., via SRB4) the QoE measurement results of an application (or service).
  • the service for which the report is being sent is indicated in the “serviceType” IE.
  • the measReportAppLayer IE can also include a qoe-reference IE, as discussed above, containing the PLMN identity and an ID associated with the QoE measurement collection.
  • a UE capable of application layer measurement reporting in RRC CONNECTED may initiate the procedure when configured with application layer measurement, i.e., when measConfigAppLayer has been configured by E-UTRAN. Upon initiating the procedure, the UE shall:
  • Figure 16 shows a more detailed signal flow of activation of QoE measurement collection and reporting of collected information without UE mobility in an LTE network.
  • This signal flow is between a measurement collection entity (MCE, 1650), a network manager (NM, 1640), a domain manager (DM/EM, 1630), one or more eNBs (1620) in E-UTRAN, and the UE (1610) - particularly access stratum (or access, for short) and application parts of the UE.
  • MCE measurement collection entity
  • NM network manager
  • DM/EM domain manager
  • the NM sends an Activate Measurement Job message to the DM, which forwards to the message to the eNB in operation 2.
  • the message includes a service type (e.g., streaming), an area scope, a measurement configuration file for the QoE measurements to be performed, and a QoE reference identifier.
  • the eNB identifies served cells matching the area scope, as well as UEs in these served cells that match other parameters in the message (e.g., service type). The eNB can base this determination on UE capability information sent from the UE to the eNB (not shown).
  • the eNB sends an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to the AS (e.g., RRC layer) of the UE.
  • the eNB includes the service type, the area scope (e.g., one or more cells, tracking areas, etc.), the measurement configuration file, and the QoE reference .
  • AT command +CAPPLEVMC is of the following form when used for QoE measurement configuration:
  • +CAPPLEVMC ⁇ app-meas_service_type>, ⁇ start-stop_reporting>[, ⁇ app- meas_config_file_length>, ⁇ app-meas_config-file>], where the various fields are defined below: ⁇ n>: integer type. Disable and enable presentation of the unsolicited result code
  • ⁇ app-meas_config_file_length> integer type. Indicates the number of octets of the ⁇ app- meas_config-file> parameter.
  • ⁇ app-meas_config-file> string of octets. Contains the application level measurement configuration file for the application indicated by the ⁇ app-meas_service_type>. The parameter shall not be subject to conventional character conversion as per +CSCS.
  • the UE starts an application associated with the service type and initiates measurement collection according to the received configuration and area.
  • the UE assigns this measurement collection a recording session ID and reports this ID (in operation 7) to the UE AS using the same AT command.
  • the UE AS sends this ID to the eNB in a MeasReportAppLayer RRC message, and the eNB notifies the NM of the initiation of the measurement collection in operation 9.
  • the UE application layer completes the QoE measurement collection according to the received configuration (operation 10) and reports the results to the UE AS via AT command +CAPPLEVMR (operation 11) along with the associated QoE reference ID received earlier.
  • the report can be a transparent container, as discussed earlier.
  • AT command +CAPPLEVMC is of the following form when used for QoE measurement reporting:
  • ⁇ app_meas_service_type> integer type. Contains the indication of what application that is providing the application level measurement report.
  • ⁇ app-meas_report> string of octets. Contains the application level measurement configuration file for the application indicated by the ⁇ app-meas_service_type>. The parameter shall not be subject to conventional character conversion as per +CSCS.
  • the UE AS sends the report and the QoE reference ID to the eNB in a MeasReportAppLayer RRC message.
  • the eNB subsequently forwards the report to the MCE (operation 13).
  • the MCE may forward the QoE measurement report another entity in the network for analysis and further action (e.g., in the OAM system).
  • a new study item for “Study on NR QoE management and optimizations for diverse services” has been approved for NR Rel-16.
  • the purpose is to study solutions for QoE measurements in NR, not only for streaming services as in LTE but also for other services such as augmented or virtual reality (AR/VR), URLLC, etc.
  • AR/VR augmented or virtual reality
  • URLLC augmented or virtual reality
  • the NR study will also include more adaptive QoE management schemes that enable intelligent network optimization to satisfy user experience for diverse services.
  • UE QoE measurements made in NG-RAN may be initiated by a management function (e.g., OAM) in a generic way for a group of UEs, or they may be initiated by the core network (e.g., 5GC) towards a specific UE based on signaling with the NG-RAN.
  • a management function e.g., OAM
  • the core network e.g., 5GC
  • the configuration of the measurement includes the measurement details, which is encapsulated in a container that is transparent to the NG-RAN.
  • the RAN e.g., E-UTRAN or NG-RAN
  • the RAN is not aware of an ongoing streaming session for a UE and nor of when QoE measurements are being performed by the UE. Even so, it is important for the client or management function analyzing the measurements that the entire streaming session is measured. It is beneficial, then, that the UE maintains QoE measurements for the entire session, even during handover situation. It has been concluded during a 3GPP study that fragmented QoE reports are of little use. However, it is an implementation decision when RAN stops the QoE measurements. For example, it could be done when the UE has moved outside the measured area, e.g., due to a handover.
  • a UE delivers a QoE measurement report via RRC, which is terminated at the gNB-CU in case of the split architecture.
  • RRC Radio Resource Management unit
  • a gNB-DU needs to make a prompt reaction to a QoE measurement report since the gNB-DU handles the radio resource management unit (e.g., scheduler) in the gNB.
  • a gNB-CU may need to change scheduling priorities.
  • QoE reporting may be useful for classification of UEs (e.g., mapping between QoE measurement and UE classes) and provisioning of privileged resources to some class of UEs, as desired and/or required. Since the radio resources are owned by the gNB-DU in split architecture, it may be necessary to deliver the QoE measurement report to the gNB-DU to facilitate QoE-aware resource allocation in the NG-RAN.
  • embodiments of the present disclosure provide network signaling techniques that make a QoE measurement report available at the gNB-DU (or ng-eNB-DU) serving a cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE.
  • the delivery of a QoE measurement report from CU to the DU can enable the DU to act promptly in managing resources owned/controlled by the DU.
  • Embodiments can also improve responsive in DC architectures.
  • a QoE measurement report can be sent from MeNB to gNB-CU, which can then deliver it to the gNB- DU.
  • a QoE measurement report can be sent from MgNB to SgNB-CU (or vice versa), which can then deliver it to the SgNB-DU.
  • embodiments facilitate delivery of a QoE measurement report between two NG-RAN nodes, e.g., over Xn or NG interface.
  • a RAN node can perform a QoE- aware resource allocation for various types of services.
  • QoE measurements can be combined with the radio link measurements executed in the RAN to facilitate a QoE-aware radio resource scheduler in the RAN node (e.g., gNB-DU).
  • RAN nodes can provide more intelligent and/or adaptive QoS/QoE control and resource allocation mechanisms that take advantage of real-time QoE measurements reported by UEs, as well as UE characteristics available from respective UE contexts.
  • the following groups of terms and/or abbreviations are used synonymously in the description of various embodiments:
  • NG-RAN node is used to refer to either a gNB or an ng-eNB, such as discussed above.
  • an “NG-RAN node CU” refers to a gNB-CU or an ng-eNB- CU
  • NG-RAN node DU refers to a gNB-DU or an ng-eNB-DU.
  • a first radio network node (RNN) forwarding a received QoE measurement report to a second RNN does not preclude the first RNN from also extracting information from the QoE measurement report to use for operations of the first RNN and/or for serving UEs.
  • an NG-RAN node CU signals the QoE measurement report to a NG-RAN node DU over an FI interface (e.g., Fl-AP).
  • This NG-RAN node DU serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE.
  • Figure 17 shows an exemplary signal flow diagram between an NG-RAN node CU (1710) and DU (1720) according to these embodiments.
  • a gNB-CU may deliver the QMR to a gNB-DU over the FI interface in various ways, including the following:
  • UE CONTEXT MODIFICATION REQUEST • Inside an existing UE-associated (UA) F1AP message, e.g., UE CONTEXT MODIFICATION REQUEST.
  • UE CONTEXT MODIFICATION REQUEST e.g., UE CONTEXT MODIFICATION REQUEST.
  • UE CONTEXT MODIFICATION REQUEST e.g., UE CONTEXT MODIFICATION REQUEST.
  • F1AP message e.g., CU-DU RADIO INFORMATION TRANSFER, GNB-DU RESOURCE COORDINATION REQUEST or GNB-CU CONFIGURATION UPDATE.
  • NUA non-UE associated
  • an ng-eNB-CU may deliver the QMR to an ng-eNB-DU over the W1 interface in various ways, including the following:
  • UE-associated W1AP message e.g., UE CONTEXT MODIFICATION REQUEST.
  • UE CONTEXT MODIFICATION REQUEST e.g., UE CONTEXT MODIFICATION REQUEST.
  • NUA non-UE associated
  • W1AP messages e.g., “NG-ENB-CU-DU RADIO INFORMATION TRANSFER”.
  • N-ENB-CU-DU RADIO INFORMATION TRANSFER e.g., “NG-ENB-CU-DU RADIO INFORMATION TRANSFER”.
  • a DU may request a QoE report for one or more specific UEs, e.g., based on corresponding one or more UE identities (UE IDs).
  • UE IDs UE identities
  • the CU Upon receiving the QoE report request from DU, the CU responds with the requested QoE measurement report for the specified UE(s).
  • FIG. 18 shows an exemplary signal flow diagram involving a CU (1810) of a first NG-RAN node and a CU (1830) and a DU (1820) of a second NG-RAN node according to these embodiments. Reference numbers will be omitted in the following discussion for brevity.
  • the first NG-RAN node Upon receiving a QoE measurement report from a UE, the first NG-RAN node forwards the received QoE measurement report to a second NG-RAN node that serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE.
  • the CU of the first NG-RAN node forwards the report over the Xn interface to a CU of the second NG-RAN node.
  • the CU signals the QoE measurement report DU over an FI interface (e.g., Fl-AP) to the DU that serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE.
  • an FI interface e.g., Fl-AP
  • the first NG-RAN node and second NG-RAN node shown in Figure 18 may have established a DC scenario for UE (e.g., LTE-DC, EN-DC, NE-DC, NR-DC, etc.).
  • UE e.g., LTE-DC, EN-DC, NE-DC, NR-DC, etc.
  • one of the first and second NG-RAN nodes is the UE’s MN, the other is the UE’s SN, and the signaling can go in either direction depending on whether SN or MN received the QoE measurement report. More specifically, if the QoE measurements is performed with respect to a cell served by the SN but the corresponding QoE measurement report is received by the MN, the MN signals the QoE measurement report to the SN according to Figure 18.
  • the SN signals the QoE measurement report to the MN according to Figure 18.
  • Figure 18 show the split CU-DU architecture, the same principles can be applied for two NG-RAN nodes of a conventional, non-split architecture.
  • the QMR can be delivered between the MN (NG-RAN node) and SN (NG-RAN node) via Xn interface in various ways, including the following:
  • XnAP message e.g., NG-RAN NODE CONFIGURATION UPDATE.
  • NG-RAN NODE CONFIGURATION UPDATE e.g., NG-RAN NODE CONFIGURATION UPDATE.
  • QMRs for one or several applications
  • the QMR can be delivered between the MN (e.g., MeNB) and SN (e.g., SgNB) via X2 interface in various ways, including the following:
  • NUA non-UE associated
  • Figures 19-20 show two exemplary signal flow diagrams according to these embodiments.
  • Figure 19 shows an exemplary signal flow diagram involving a CU (1810) of a first NG-RAN node and a CU (1830) and a DU (1820) of a second NG-RAN node, with the two NG-RAN nodes being connected to a node or function in 5GC (1840), such as an AMF.
  • elements shown in Figure 19 can be the same as identically numbered elements in Figure 18. Reference numbers will be omitted in the following discussion for brevity.
  • the first NG-RAN node Upon receiving a QoE measurement report from a UE, the first NG-RAN node forwards the received QoE measurement report to an AMF in the 5GC over an NG interface. The AMF then forwards the report to a second NG-RAN node that serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE. In the example shown in Figure 19, the report is forwarded over an NG interface to a CU of the second NG- RAN node. Subsequently, the CU signals the QoE measurement report DU over an FI interface (e.g., Fl-AP) to the DU that serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE.
  • an FI interface e.g., Fl-AP
  • the QMR can be delivered between the NG-RAN nodes via an AMF over the NG interface inside an existing NGAP message, e.g., Uplink RAN Configuration Transfer, and or Downlink RAN Configuration Transfer.
  • an existing NGAP message e.g., Uplink RAN Configuration Transfer, and or Downlink RAN Configuration Transfer.
  • several QMRs (a list of QMRs) for several UEs or several applications running at the same UE can be delivered.
  • An AMF may receive QoE measurement report data from an NG-RAN node in an NGAP message as a transparent container to be forwarded to a destination NG-RAN node, e.g., the NG- RAN node controlling the cell in which the QoE measurement report data was collected.
  • the received NGAP message can include an identifier of the destination NG-RAN node, the destination NG-RAN node’s IP address, or an identity of the cell.
  • the AMF can identity the destination NG-RAN node based on any of these in the NGAP message.
  • the AMF forwards the received QoE measurement report data (i.e., the transparent container) to one or more AMFs connected to the destination NG-RAN node. This forwarding is performed over the N14 interface, e.g., using a Configuration Transfer Tunnel message or a new N14 message.
  • the receiving AMF(s) in turn forwards the QoE measurement report data (i.e., the transparent container) to the destination NG-RAN node in an NGAP message, e.g., Uplink RAN Configuration Transfer, Downlink RAN Configuration Transfer, or a new NGAP message.
  • Figure 20 shows an exemplary signal flow diagram based on the two RAN nodes being connected to an EPC. More specifically, Figure 20 involves a CU (2010) of a first RAN node and a CU (2030) and a DU (2020) of a second RAN node, with the two RAN nodes being connected to a node or function in EPC (2040), such as an MME. Reference numbers will be omitted in the following discussion for brevity. Note that while Figure 20 show the split CU- DU architecture, the same principles can be applied between two RAN nodes of a conventional, non-split architecture.
  • the first RAN node Upon receiving a QoE measurement report from a UE, the first RAN node forwards the received QoE measurement report to an MME in the EPC over an SI interface (e.g., Sl-AP).
  • the MME then forwards the report to a second RAN node that serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE.
  • the report is forwarded over an SI interface to a CU of the second RAN node.
  • the CU signals the QoE measurement report DU over an FI interface (e.g., Fl-AP) to the DU that serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE.
  • the QMR can be delivered between the RAN nodes via an MME over the SI interface inside an a newly defined S1AP message, e.g., QoE REPORT or SON REPORT.
  • An MME may receive QoE measurement report data from a RAN node in an S1AP message as a transparent container to be forwarded to a destination RAN node, e.g. , the RAN node controlling the cell in which the QoE measurement report data was collected.
  • the received SI AP message can include an identifier of the destination RAN node, the destination RAN node’s IP address, or an identity of the cell.
  • the MME can identity the destination RAN node based on any of these in the S1AP message.
  • the MME forwards the received QoE measurement report data (i.e., the transparent container) to an MME connected to the destination RAN node.
  • the receiving MME in turn forwards the QoE measurement report data (i.e., the transparent container) to the destination RAN node in an SI AP message, discussed above.
  • the QoE measurement report can be exchanged between RAN nodes connected to different CNs, e.g., first RAN node connected to EPC and second RAN node connected to 5GC. If there is no direct interface between the RAN nodes, the transfer of the QoE measurement reports may be performed based on forwarding between the two CNs. For example, forwarding of a transparent RAN container containing QoE measurement report data may be performed over the N26 interface from an AMF (in 5GC) to an MME (in EPC) or from an MME to an AMF.
  • QoE measurement reports can be sent as a single measurement report or RAN nodes may collect multiple QoE measurement reports and send them as a group and/or list to the other RAN nodes according to the different embodiments described above.
  • a UE may be configured to operate in multiple radio access technologies (RATs), such as NR and LTE. Accordingly, a UE that collects QoE measurements in a particular RAT (also referred to as “source RAT”) may have various options of when to report the collected QoE measurements, including the following:
  • the UE may continue the QoE measurements and provide the report of the QoE measurement of the source RAT to the target RAT.
  • the UE may stop the QoE measurements and provide the report of the QoE measurement of the source RAT to the target RAT. • After handover from the source RAT to the target RAT, the UE may stop the QoE measurements and keep the QoE measurement of the source RAT until it returns back to the source RAT again and report it to the source RAT.
  • the UE may continue the QoE measurements but keep the QoE measurement of the source RAT until it returns to the source RAT and report it to the source RAT at that time.
  • the UE may continue the QoE measurements and send the report of the QoE measurements performed on both connectivity legs on the new connectivity leg.
  • another connectivity leg e.g., a secondary cell controlled by a secondary RAN node
  • the data flow of the measured application is transferred to the new connectivity leg
  • the new connectivity leg may be of the same RAT as the connectivity leg where the QoE measurement started (e.g., NR DC) or a different RAT (e.g., EN-DC)
  • the UE may continue the QoE measurements and send the report of the QoE measurements performed on both connectivity legs on the new connectivity leg.
  • the UE may continue the QoE measurements and send the report of the QoE measurements performed on both connectivity legs on the connectivity leg where the QoE measurements started.
  • another connectivity leg e.g., a secondary cell controlled by a secondary RAN node
  • the new connectivity leg may be of the same RAT as the connectivity leg where the QoE measurement started (e.g., NR DC) or a different RAT (e.g., EN-DC)
  • the UE may continue the QoE measurements and send the report of the QoE measurements performed on both connectivity legs on the connectivity leg where the QoE measurements started.
  • the UE may continue the QoE measurements and divide the results of the QoE measurements into one part for the QoE measurements performed on the first connectivity leg (where the QoE measurement was started) and another part for the QoE measurements performed on the second connectivity leg and report each part separately on the connectivity leg on which the respective QoE measurements were performed.
  • the QoE measurement started e.g., NR DC
  • a different RAT e.g., EN-DC
  • the UE may stop the QoE measurements and send the report of the QoE measurements on the connectivity leg where the QoE measurements were performed.
  • another connectivity leg e.g., a secondary cell controlled by a secondary RAN node
  • the data flow of the measured application is transferred to the new connectivity leg
  • the new connectivity leg may be of the same RAT as the connectivity leg where the QoE measurement started (e.g., NR DC) or a different RAT (e.g., EN-DC)
  • the UE may stop the QoE measurements and send the report of the QoE measurements on the connectivity leg where the QoE measurements were performed.
  • the UE also restarts the QoE measurements on the new connectivity leg and when a report on these subsequent (restarted) QoE measurements have been compiled, the UE may send it on the connectivity leg where the QoE measurements were performed (i.e., the new connectivity leg in this case).
  • the UE may continue the QoE measurements and send the report of the QoE measurements performed on both connectivity legs duplicated on both connectivity legs.
  • another connectivity leg e.g., a secondary cell controlled by a secondary RAN node
  • the data flow of the measured application is transferred to the new connectivity leg
  • the new connectivity leg may be of the same RAT as the connectivity leg where the QoE measurement started (e.g., NR DC) or a different RAT (e.g., EN-DC)
  • the UE may continue the QoE measurements and send the report of the QoE measurements performed on both connectivity legs duplicated on both connectivity legs.
  • the UE may: o continue the QoE measurements on both legs, and divide the results of the QoE measurements into one part for the QoE measurements performed on the first connectivity leg (where the QoE measurement was started) and another part for the QoE measurements performed on the second connectivity leg and report each part separately on the connectivity leg on which the respective QoE measurements were performed; o continue the QoE measurements on both legs and send the resulting QoE measurement report on the connectivity leg on which the QoE measurements were started; o continue the QoE measurements on both legs and send the resulting QoE measurement report on the connectivity leg on which the QoE measurements were started; o continue the QoE measurements on both legs and send the resulting QoE measurement report on the connectivity leg on which the QoE measurements were started; o continue the QoE measurements on both legs and send the resulting QoE measurement report on the connectivity leg on which the QoE measurements were started; o continue the QoE measurements on both legs and send the resulting QoE measurement report on the connectivity leg on which
  • the UE may: o continue the QoE measurements on both legs as a single QoE measurement session for both connectivity legs (e.g., for the merged data flow resulting from putting together the application data arriving at the different connectivity legs) and send the resulting QoE measurement report on the connectivity leg on which the QoE measurement was started; o continue the QoE measurements on both legs as a single QoE measurement session for both connectivity legs simultaneously (e.g., for the
  • Table 11 shows exemplary contents of a CU-DU RADIO INFORMATION TRANSFER message, modified according to various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the message can be sent over an FI interface between a gNB-CU and a gNB-DU.
  • Table 12 below shows exemplary contents of a CU-DU RADIO INFORMATION TRANSFER message, according to various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the message can be sent over a W1 interface between an ng-eNB-CU and a ng-eNB-DU.
  • Figure 21 illustrates an exemplary signaling flow according to these embodiments.
  • a new message QoE REPORT can also be defined to send QoE measurement reports over an FI interface between a gNB-CU and a gNB-DU.
  • Table 13 below shows exemplary contents of a QoE REPORT message according to these embodiments.
  • a gNB CU can use UE-associated or non-UE-associated signaling depending on the existence of the UE context at the time of receiving the QoE report.
  • a QoE measurement report can be included in an Fl-C TRAFFC TRANSFER message, without intervention/modification by the gNB-CU, provided that the FI AP message for QoE measurement report is defined according to embodiments described above.
  • a new message QoE REPORT can also be defined to send QoE measurement reports over a W1 interface between an ng-eNB-CU and an ng-eNB-DU.
  • Table 14 below shows exemplary contents of a QoE REPORT message according to these embodiments.
  • An ng-eNB- CU can use UE-associated or non-UE-associated signaling depending on the existence of the UE context at the time of receiving the QoE report Table 14.
  • both the UPLINK RAN CONFIGURATION TRANSFER and DOWNLINK RAN CONFIGURATION TRANSFER messages can be used to transfer QoE measurement report via AMF between NG-RAN nodes without Xn interface. Both of these messages include a SON Configuration Transfer information element (IE). Table 15 below shows exemplary contents of a SON Configuration Transfer IE modified according to various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • IE SON Configuration Transfer information element
  • eNB CONFIGURATION TRANSFER and MME CONFIGURATION TRANSFER messages can be used to transfer QoE measurement reports via MME between RAN nodes without direct X2 interface. Both of these messages include a SON Configuration Transfer IE. Table 16 below shows exemplary contents of a SON Configuration Transfer IE modified according to various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • a gNB-CU or ng-eNB-CU may extract content that can be used to trigger the modification of UP attributes, such as the modification of an established PDU Session (or setup of a new one) or modification of an established bearer (or setup of a new one).
  • Modifications may include changing the QoS associated with a bearer or an application data flow, or changing the scheduling priority of a UE, a bearer, or a data flow.
  • Other possible modifications include changed packet marking and release of a bearer or PDU session.
  • Other possible modifications include temporarily disabling data rate throttling or temporarily ignoring subscription-associated data volume caps.
  • Some of these UP -related modifications may involve signalling to the 5GC to facilitate enforcement by suitable entity, such as a gateway (e.g., a PDN Gateway, PGW) or a User Plane Function (UPF).
  • a gateway e.g., a PDN Gateway, PGW
  • UPF User Plane Function
  • the QoE measurement report information extracted by a CU-CP may be used to trigger CU-UP to modify settings of an existing bearer or setup a new bearer for the same UE. This can be done by reusing existing El AP procedures, such as Bearer Context Modification or Bearer Context Setup messages.
  • QoE measurement information may be sent from CU-CP to 5GC which may decide to modify an existing PDU Session or setup/release a (redundant) PDU Session based on the QoE measurement report content that indicates QoE requirements are not fulfilled or are recovered.
  • PDU SESSION RESOURCE NOTIFY which includes a PDU Session Resource Modify Indication Transfer IE.
  • Table 17 below shows exemplary contents of a PDU Session Resource Modify Indication Transfer IE modified according to various embodiments of the present disclosure to include QoE measurements information.
  • Figures 22- 23 and 33-34 show exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) performed by a first RAN node (RNN), a second RNN, a core network (CN) node, and a UE, respectively.
  • RNN first RAN node
  • CN core network
  • UE UE
  • various features of operations described below correspond to various embodiments described above.
  • the exemplary methods illustrated by Figures 22-23 and 33-34 can be used cooperatively to provide various benefits and/or advantages, including those described herein.
  • Figures 22-23 and 33-34 show specific blocks in particular orders, the operations represented by the blocks can be performed in different orders than shown and can be combined and/or divided into blocks having different functionality than shown. Optional blocks or operations are indicated by dashed lines.
  • Figure 22 shows a flow diagram of an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for handling QoE measurements by UEs in a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the exemplary method can be performed by a first radio access network node (RNN, e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc., or component thereof) in a wireless network (e.g., E-UTRAN, NG-RAN).
  • RNN radio access network node
  • a wireless network e.g., E-UTRAN, NG-RAN
  • the exemplary method can include operations of block 2210, where the first RNN can receive, from a UE via a first cell, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a second cell.
  • the exemplary method can include operations of block 2220, where the first RNN can determine that the second cell is served by a second RNN.
  • the exemplary method can include operations of block 2240, where the first RNN can, based on determining that the second cell is served by the second RNN, forward the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
  • the first cell uses a first radio access technology (RAT) and one of the following applies: the second cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT, or the second cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE.
  • RAT radio access technology
  • the QoE measurement report also includes further application-layer QoE measurements associated with the first cell.
  • the application-layer QoE measurements are associated with the second cell and the first cell.
  • the first RNN is a centralized unit (CU) of a base station
  • the second RNN is a distributed unit (DU) of the base station
  • the QoE measurement report is forwarded (e.g., in block 2240) via an intra-base station interface between the CU and the DU.
  • an intra-base station interface between the CU and the DU.
  • the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface.
  • the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
  • the first RNN is one of a master node (MN) or a secondary node (SN) in dual connectivity (DC) with the UE, and the second RNN is the other of the MN and the SN.
  • the QoE measurement report is forwarded (e.g., in block 2240) via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN.
  • the inter-base station interface can be an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
  • the first RNN is a first CU of one of an MN and an SN in DC with the UE
  • the second RNN is a second DU of the other of the MN and SN.
  • the QoE measurement report is forwarded (e.g., in block 2240) via an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU.
  • the inter- base station interface can be an Xn interface or an X2 interface. An example of these embodiments is illustrated by Figure 18.
  • the exemplary method can also include operations of block 2230, where the first RNN can determine whether there is a direct inter-base station interface between the first and second RNNs.
  • the forwarding operation of block 2240 can include the operations of sub-block 2241, where the first RNN can, based on determining that there is no direct inter-base station interface between the first RNN and the second RNN, send the QoE measurement report to a core network (CN) node connected to the first RNN for forwarding to the second RNN.
  • the QoE measurement report is sent to the CN node (e.g., in sub-block 2241) in a request to enable modifications of resources for an established protocol data unit (PDU) session for the UE.
  • PDU protocol data unit
  • the CN node is an access and mobility management function (AMF) and the QoE measurement report is forwarded to the AMF via an NG interface.
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • the CN node is a mobility management entity (MME) and the QoE measurement report is forwarded to the MME via an S 1 interface.
  • MME mobility management entity
  • Figure 23 shows a flow diagram of another exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for handling QoE measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the exemplary method can be performed by a second RNN (e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc., or component thereof) in a wireless network (e.g., E-UTRAN, NG-RAN).
  • a second RNN e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc., or component thereof
  • a wireless network e.g., E-UTRAN, NG-RAN.
  • the exemplary method can include the operations of block 2310, where the second RNN can receive, from a UE via a first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell served by the second RNN.
  • the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 2320, where the second RNN can, based on the QoE measurement report, adapt resource allocation associated with at least one of the cell and the UE.
  • adapting the resource allocation can be further based on radio link measurements, for the cell, that are received by the second RNN from UEs served by the cell.
  • the first cell uses a first RAT and one of the following applies: the second cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT, or the second cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE.
  • the QoE measurement report also includes further application-layer QoE measurements associated with the first cell.
  • the application-layer QoE measurements are associated with the second cell and the first cell.
  • the first RNN is a CU of a base station
  • the second RNN is a DU of the base station
  • the QoE measurement report is received (e.g., in block 2310) via an intra base station interface between the CU and the DU.
  • an intra base station interface between the CU and the DU.
  • the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface.
  • the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
  • the first RNN is one of an MN or an SN in DC with the UE
  • the second RNN is the other of the MN and the SN.
  • the QoE measurement report is received (e.g., in block 2310) via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN.
  • the inter-base station interface can be an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
  • the first RNN is a first CU of one of an MN and an SN in DC with the UE
  • the second RNN is a second DU of the other of the MN and SN.
  • the QoE measurement report is received (e.g., in block 2310) via an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU, and via an intra-base station interface between the second CU and the second DU.
  • the inter- base station interface is an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
  • the intra-base station interface is an FI interface or a W1 interface.
  • the QoE measurement report is received (e.g., in block 2310) via a first interface between the first RNN and a first CN node and via a second interface between the second RNN and either the first CN node or a second CN node.
  • the first and second CN nodes are first and second AMFs, and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces.
  • Figure 19 An example is illustrated by Figure 19.
  • the first and second CN nodes are first and second MMEs, and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces.
  • Figure 20 is illustrated by Figure 20.
  • the first and second CN nodes are the same (e.g., a single CN node, such as an AMF).
  • the second interface is between the second RNN and the first CN node.
  • the first and second CN nodes are different (e.g., first and second AMFs), the second interface is between the second RNN and the second CN node, and the QoE measurement report is also received via a third interface between the first and second CN nodes.
  • the second RNN is a CU of a base station and the QoE measurement report is received (e.g., in block 2310) by a control plane component of the CU (CU-CP).
  • adapting the resource allocation in block 2320 can include the operations of sub blocks 2321-2322.
  • the second RNN can extract, from the QoE measurement report, information related to one of the following associated with the UE: a PDU session, a bearer, and a data flow.
  • the second RNN can, based on the extracted information, send to a user plane component of the CU (CU-UP) a request to perform one or more of the following operations:
  • Figure 33 shows a flow diagram of another exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for handling QoE measurements by UEs in a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the exemplary method can be performed by aCN node (e.g., MME, AMF, etc.) associated with a radio access network (RAN, e.g., E-UTRAN, NG-RAN).
  • RAN radio access network
  • the exemplary method can include the operations of block 3310, where the CN node can receive, from a UE via a first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell serving the UE.
  • the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3320, where the CN node can determine that the cell is served by a second RNN.
  • the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3340, where the CN node can, based on determining that the cell is served by the second RNN, send the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
  • the first RNN uses a first RAT and one of the following applies: the cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT, or the cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE.
  • determining that the cell is served by the second RNN is based on one of the following associated with the QoE measurement report: an identifier of the cell, an identifier of the second RNN, or an IP address of the second RNN.
  • the QoE measurement report is received via a first interface between the first RNN and the CN node, and the QoE measurement report is sent via a second interface between the second RNN and the CN node.
  • the CN node is an AMF and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces.
  • the CN node is an MME and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces.
  • the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3330, where the CN node can determine whether the second RNN is connected to at least one of the CN node and a second CN node.
  • the QoE measurement report is sent to the second RNN (e.g., in block 3340) via a third interface between the CN node and the second CN node based on determining that the second RNN is connected to the second CN node but not to the CN node.
  • the CN node and the second CN node are AMFs and the third interface is an N14 interface.
  • one of the CN node and the second CN node is an AMF
  • the other of the CN node and the second CN node is an MME
  • the third interface is an N26 interface.
  • Figure 34 shows a flow diagram of an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for performing QoE measurements in a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the exemplary method can be performed by a UE (e.g., wireless device, IoT device, etc.) such as described elsewhere herein.
  • a UE e.g., wireless device, IoT device, etc.
  • the exemplary method can include the operation of block 3410, where the UE can, while operating in a first cell of the wireless network that uses a first RAT, initiate QoE measurements for one or more services provided by the UE application layer.
  • the exemplary method can include the operation of block 3420, where the UE can subsequently perform one or more mobility procedures towards other cells of the wireless network.
  • the one or more mobility operations include at least one of the following:
  • the exemplary method can include the operation of block 3480, where the UE can send, to the wireless network, one or more QoE measurement reports including QoE measurements performed by the UE in at least the first cell.
  • the one or more mobility procedures comprise a handover from the first cell to a second cell uses the different RAT and the one or more QoE measurement reports include a single QoE measurement report sent via the second cell.
  • the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3450 or block 3460.
  • the UE can continue the QoE measurements in the second cell; in such case, the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed in the first cell and the second cell.
  • the UE can stop the QoE measurements in the second cell; in such case, the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed only in the first cell.
  • the one or more mobility procedures comprise a first handover from the first cell to a third cell that uses the different RAT, and a second handover from the third cell to a second cell that uses the first RAT.
  • the one or more QoE measurement reports comprise a single QoE measurement report sent via the second cell.
  • the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3430 or block 3440.
  • the UE can continue the QoE measurements in the third cell; in such case, the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed in the first cell and the third cell.
  • the UE can stop the QoE measurements in the third cell; in such case, the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed only in the first cell.
  • the one or more mobility procedures comprise addition of connectivity to the wireless network via a second cell served by a different network node than the first cell.
  • the second cell can either use the first RAT or the different RAT.
  • the added connectivity can be via a cell of an SCG served by an SN.
  • communication of data for the one or more services is according to one of the following: via the second cell only, non overlapping portions of the data via the first and second cells, or duplicated via both the first and second cells.
  • the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3450, discussed above.
  • the one or more QoE measurement reports include one of the following:
  • first and second QoE measurement reports including the QoE measurements performed in the respective first and second cells and sent via the respective first and second cells;
  • the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3460, discussed above.
  • the one or more QoE measurement reports include a first QoE measurement report including measurements performed only in the first cell and sent via the first cell.
  • the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3470, where the UE can restart the stopped QoE measurements in the second cell.
  • the one or more QoE measurement reports also include a second QoE measurement report including measurements performed only in the second cell and sent via the second cell.
  • Figure 24 shows an exemplary wireless network in which various embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented.
  • the wireless network of Figure 24 only depicts network 2406, network nodes 2460 and 2460b, and WDs 2410, 2410b, and 2410c.
  • a wireless network can further include any additional elements suitable to support communication between wireless devices or between a wireless device and another communication device, such as a landline telephone, a service provider, or any other network node or end device.
  • network node 2460 and wireless device (WD) 2410 are depicted with additional detail.
  • the wireless network can provide communication and other types of services to one or more wireless devices to facilitate the wireless devices’ access to and/or use of the services provided by, or via, the wireless network.
  • the wireless network can comprise and/or interface with any type of communication, telecommunication, data, cellular, and/or radio network or other similar type of system.
  • the wireless network can be configured to operate according to specific standards or other types of predefined rules or procedures.
  • particular embodiments of the wireless network can implement communication standards, such as Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), Long Term Evolution (LTE), and/or other suitable 2G, 3G, 4G, or 5G standards; wireless local area network (WLAN) standards, such as the IEEE 802.11 standards; and/or any other appropriate wireless communication standard, such as the Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMax), Bluetooth, Z-Wave and/or ZigBee standards.
  • GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • WiMax Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • Bluetooth Z-Wave and/or ZigBee standards.
  • Network 2406 can comprise one or more backhaul networks, core networks, IP networks, public switched telephone networks (PSTNs), packet data networks, optical networks, wide-area networks (WANs), local area networks (LANs), wireless local area networks (WLANs), wired networks, wireless networks, metropolitan area networks, and other networks to enable communication between devices.
  • PSTNs public switched telephone networks
  • WANs wide-area networks
  • LANs local area networks
  • WLANs wireless local area networks
  • wired networks wireless networks, metropolitan area networks, and other networks to enable communication between devices.
  • Network node 2460 and WD 2410 comprise various components described in more detail below. These components work together in order to provide network node and/or wireless device functionality, such as providing wireless connections in a wireless network.
  • the wireless network can comprise any number of wired or wireless networks, network nodes, base stations, controllers, wireless devices, relay stations, and/or any other components or systems that can facilitate or participate in the communication of data and/or signals whether via wired or wireless connections.
  • network nodes include, but are not limited to, access points (APs) (e.g., radio access points), base stations (BSs) (e.g., radio base stations, Node Bs, evolved Node Bs (eNBs) and NR NodeBs (gNBs)).
  • APs access points
  • BSs base stations
  • eNBs evolved Node Bs
  • gNBs NR NodeBs
  • Base stations can be categorized based on the amount of coverage they provide (or, stated differently, their transmit power level) and can then also be referred to as femto base stations, pico base stations, micro base stations, or macro base stations.
  • a base station can be a relay node or a relay donor node controlling a relay.
  • a network node can also include one or more (or all) parts of a distributed radio base station such as centralized digital units and/or remote radio units (RRUs), sometimes referred to as Remote Radio Heads (RRHs). Such remote radio units may or may not be integrated with an antenna as an antenna integrated radio. Parts of a distributed radio base station can also be referred to as nodes in a distributed antenna system (DAS).
  • DAS distributed antenna system
  • network nodes include multi-standard radio (MSR) equipment such as MSR BSs, network controllers such as radio network controllers (RNCs) or base station controllers (BSCs), base transceiver stations (BTSs), transmission points, transmission nodes, multi-cell/multicast coordination entities (MCEs), core network nodes (e.g, MSCs, MMEs, AMFs), O&M nodes, OSS nodes, SON nodes, positioning nodes (e.g, E-SMLCs), and/or MDTs.
  • MSR multi-standard radio
  • RNCs radio network controllers
  • BSCs base station controllers
  • BTSs base transceiver stations
  • transmission points transmission nodes
  • MCEs multi-cell/multicast coordination entities
  • core network nodes e.g, MSCs, MMEs, AMFs
  • O&M nodes e.g, OSS nodes, SON nodes, positioning nodes (e.g, E-SMLCs), and/or MDT
  • network nodes can represent any suitable device (or group of devices) capable, configured, arranged, and/or operable to enable and/or provide a wireless device with access to the wireless network or to provide some service to a wireless device that has accessed the wireless network.
  • network node 2460 includes processing circuitry 2470, device readable medium 2480, interface 2490, auxiliary equipment 2484, power source 2486, power circuitry 2487, and antenna 2462.
  • network node 2460 illustrated in the example wireless network of Figure 24 can represent a device that includes the illustrated combination of hardware components, other embodiments can comprise network nodes with different combinations of components. It is to be understood that a network node comprises any suitable combination of hardware and/or software needed to perform the tasks, features, functions and methods and/or procedures disclosed herein.
  • network node 2460 can comprise multiple different physical components that make up a single illustrated component (e.g . , device readable medium 2480 can comprise multiple separate hard drives as well as multiple RAM modules).
  • network node 2460 can be composed of multiple physically separate components (e.g., a NodeB component and a RNC component, or a BTS component and a BSC component, etc.), which can each have their own respective components.
  • network node 2460 comprises multiple separate components (e.g., BTS and BSC components)
  • one or more of the separate components can be shared among several network nodes.
  • a single RNC can control multiple NodeB’s.
  • each unique NodeB and RNC pair can in some instances be considered a single separate network node.
  • network node 2460 can be configured to support multiple radio access technologies (RATs).
  • RATs radio access technologies
  • Network node 2460 can also include multiple sets of the various illustrated components for different wireless technologies integrated into network node 2460, such as, for example, GSM, WCDMA, LTE, NR, WiFi, or Bluetooth wireless technologies. These wireless technologies can be integrated into the same or different chip or set of chips and other components within network node 2460.
  • Processing circuitry 2470 can be configured to perform any determining, calculating, or similar operations (e.g., certain obtaining operations) described herein as being provided by a network node. These operations performed by processing circuitry 2470 can include processing information obtained by processing circuitry 2470 by, for example, converting the obtained information into other information, comparing the obtained information or converted information to information stored in the network node, and/or performing one or more operations based on the obtained information or converted information, and as a result of said processing making a determination.
  • processing information obtained by processing circuitry 2470 by, for example, converting the obtained information into other information, comparing the obtained information or converted information to information stored in the network node, and/or performing one or more operations based on the obtained information or converted information, and as a result of said processing making a determination.
  • Processing circuitry 2470 can comprise a combination of one or more of a microprocessor, controller, microcontroller, central processing unit, digital signal processor, application-specific integrated circuit, field programmable gate array, or any other suitable computing device, resource, or combination of hardware, software and/or encoded logic operable to provide various functionality of network node 2460, either alone or in conjunction with other network node 2460 components (e.g., device readable medium 2480). Such functionality can include any of the various wireless features, functions, or benefits discussed herein.
  • processing circuitry 2470 can execute instructions stored in device readable medium 2480 or in memory within processing circuitry 2470.
  • processing circuitry 2470 can include a system on a chip (SOC).
  • SOC system on a chip
  • instructions (also referred to as a computer program product) stored in medium 2480 can include instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry 2470, can configure network node 2460 to perform operations corresponding to various exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) described herein.
  • processing circuitry 2470 can include one or more of radio frequency (RF) transceiver circuitry 2472 and baseband processing circuitry 2474.
  • radio frequency (RF) transceiver circuitry 2472 and baseband processing circuitry 2474 can be on separate chips (or sets of chips), boards, or units, such as radio units and digital units.
  • part or all of RF transceiver circuitry 2472 and baseband processing circuitry 2474 can be on the same chip or set of chips, boards, or units
  • processing circuitry 2470 executing instructions stored on device readable medium 2480 or memory within processing circuitry 2470.
  • some or all of the functionality can be provided by processing circuitry 2470 without executing instructions stored on a separate or discrete device readable medium, such as in a hard-wired manner.
  • processing circuitry 2470 can be configured to perform the described functionality. The benefits provided by such functionality are not limited to processing circuitry 2470 alone or to other components of network node 2460 but are enjoyed by network node 2460 as a whole, and/or by end users and the wireless network generally.
  • Device readable medium 2480 can comprise any form of volatile or non-volatile computer readable memory including, without limitation, persistent storage, solid-state memory, remotely mounted memory, magnetic media, optical media, random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), mass storage media (for example, a hard disk), removable storage media (for example, a flash drive, a Compact Disk (CD) or a Digital Video Disk (DVD)), and/or any other volatile or non-volatile, non-transitory device readable and/or computer-executable memory devices that store information, data, and/or instructions that can be used by processing circuitry 2470.
  • volatile or non-volatile computer readable memory including, without limitation, persistent storage, solid-state memory, remotely mounted memory, magnetic media, optical media, random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), mass storage media (for example, a hard disk), removable storage media (for example, a flash drive, a Compact Disk (CD) or a Digital Video Disk (DVD)), and/or any other volatile or
  • Device readable medium 2480 can store any suitable instructions, data or information, including a computer program, software, an application including one or more of logic, rules, code, tables, etc. and/or other instructions capable of being executed by processing circuitry 2470 and, utilized by network node 2460.
  • Device readable medium 2480 can be used to store any calculations made by processing circuitry 2470 and/or any data received via interface 2490.
  • processing circuitry 2470 and device readable medium 2480 can be considered to be integrated.
  • Interface 2490 is used in the wired or wireless communication of signaling and/or data between network node 2460, network 2406, and/or WDs 2410. As illustrated, interface 2490 comprises port(s)/terminal(s) 2494 to send and receive data, for example to and from network 2406 over a wired connection. Interface 2490 also includes radio front end circuitry 2492 that can be coupled to, or in certain embodiments a part of, antenna 2462. Radio front end circuitry 2492 comprises filters 2498 and amplifiers 2496. Radio front end circuitry 2492 can be connected to antenna 2462 and processing circuitry 2470. Radio front end circuitry can be configured to condition signals communicated between antenna 2462 and processing circuitry 2470.
  • Radio front end circuitry 2492 can receive digital data that is to be sent out to other network nodes or WDs via a wireless connection. Radio front end circuitry 2492 can convert the digital data into a radio signal having the appropriate channel and bandwidth parameters using a combination of filters 2498 and/or amplifiers 2496. The radio signal can then be transmitted via antenna 2462. Similarly, when receiving data, antenna 2462 can collect radio signals which are then converted into digital data by radio front end circuitry 2492. The digital data can be passed to processing circuitry 2470. In other embodiments, the interface can comprise different components and/or different combinations of components.
  • network node 2460 may not include separate radio front end circuitry 2492, instead, processing circuitry 2470 can comprise radio front end circuitry and can be connected to antenna 2462 without separate radio front end circuitry 2492.
  • processing circuitry 2470 can comprise radio front end circuitry and can be connected to antenna 2462 without separate radio front end circuitry 2492.
  • all or some of RF transceiver circuitry 2472 can be considered a part of interface 2490.
  • interface 2490 can include one or more ports or terminals 2494, radio front end circuitry 2492, and RF transceiver circuitry 2472, as part of a radio unit (not shown), and interface 2490 can communicate with baseband processing circuitry 2474, which is part of a digital unit (not shown).
  • Antenna 2462 can include one or more antennas, or antenna arrays, configured to send and/or receive wireless signals.
  • Antenna 2462 can be coupled to radio front end circuitry 2490 and can be any type of antenna capable of transmitting and receiving data and/or signals wirelessly.
  • antenna 2462 can comprise one or more omni-directional, sector or panel antennas operable to transmit/receive radio signals between, for example, 2 GHz and 66 GHz.
  • An omni-directional antenna can be used to transmit/receive radio signals in any direction
  • a sector antenna can be used to transmit/receive radio signals from devices within a particular area
  • a panel antenna can be a line of sight antenna used to transmit/receive radio signals in a relatively straight line.
  • the use of more than one antenna can be referred to as MIMO.
  • antenna 2462 can be separate from network node 2460 and can be connectable to network node 2460 through an interface or port.
  • Antenna 2462, interface 2490, and/or processing circuitry 2470 can be configured to perform any receiving operations and/or certain obtaining operations described herein as being performed by a network node. Any information, data and/or signals can be received from a wireless device, another network node and/or any other network equipment. Similarly, antenna 2462, interface 2490, and/or processing circuitry 2470 can be configured to perform any transmitting operations described herein as being performed by a network node. Any information, data and/or signals can be transmitted to a wireless device, another network node and/or any other network equipment.
  • Power circuitry 2487 can comprise, or be coupled to, power management circuitry and can be configured to supply the components of network node 2460 with power for performing the functionality described herein. Power circuitry 2487 can receive power from power source 2486. Power source 2486 and/or power circuitry 2487 can be configured to provide power to the various components of network node 2460 in a form suitable for the respective components (e.g., at a voltage and current level needed for each respective component). Power source 2486 can either be included in, or external to, power circuitry 2487 and/or network node 2460.
  • network node 2460 can be connectable to an external power source (e.g., an electricity outlet) via an input circuitry or interface such as an electrical cable, whereby the external power source supplies power to power circuitry 2487.
  • power source 2486 can comprise a source of power in the form of a battery or battery pack which is connected to, or integrated in, power circuitry 2487. The battery can provide backup power should the external power source fail.
  • Other types of power sources such as photovoltaic devices, can also be used.
  • network node 2460 can include additional components beyond those shown in Figure 24 that can be responsible for providing certain aspects of the network node’s functionality, including any of the functionality described herein and/or any functionality necessary to support the subject maher described herein.
  • network node 2460 can include user interface equipment to allow and/or facilitate input of information into network node 2460 and to allow and/or facilitate output of information from network node 2460. This can allow and/or facilitate a user to perform diagnostic, maintenance, repair, and other administrative functions for network node 2460.
  • a wireless device (WD, e.g., WD 2410) can be configured to transmit and/or receive information without direct human interaction.
  • a WD can be designed to transmit information to a network on a predetermined schedule, when triggered by an internal or external event, or in response to requests from the network.
  • Examples of a WD include, but are not limited to, smart phones, mobile phones, cell phones, voice over IP (VoIP) phones, wireless local loop phones, desktop computers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), wireless cameras, gaming consoles or devices, music storage devices, playback appliances, wearable devices, wireless endpoints, mobile stations, tablets, laptops, laptop-embedded equipment (LEE), laptop-mounted equipment (LME), smart devices, wireless customer-premise equipment (CPE), mobile-type communication (MTC) devices, Intemet-of-Things (IoT) devices, vehicle-mounted wireless terminal devices, etc.
  • VoIP voice over IP
  • PDAs personal digital assistants
  • MTC mobile-type communication
  • IoT Intemet-of-Things
  • a WD can support device-to-device (D2D) communication, for example by implementing a 3 GPP standard for sidebnk communication, vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), vehicle-to-infrastructure (V2I), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) and can in this case be referred to as a D2D communication device.
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
  • V2I vehicle-to-infrastructure
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • a WD can represent a machine or other device that performs monitoring and/or measurements and transmits the results of such monitoring and/or measurements to another WD and/or a network node.
  • the WD can in this case be a machine-to-machine (M2M) device, which can in a 3 GPP context be referred to as an MTC device.
  • M2M machine-to-machine
  • the WD can be a UE implementing the 3GPP narrow band internet of things (NB-IoT) standard.
  • NB-IoT narrow band internet of things
  • machines or devices are sensors, metering devices such as power meters, industrial machinery, or home or personal appliances (e.g refrigerators, televisions, etc.) personal wearables (e.g., watches, fitness trackers, etc.).
  • a WD can represent a vehicle or other equipment that is capable of monitoring and/or reporting on its operational status or other functions associated with its operation.
  • a WD as described above can represent the endpoint of a wireless connection, in which case the device can be referred to as a wireless terminal. Furthermore, a WD as described above can be mobile, in which case it can also be referred to as a mobile device or a mobile terminal.
  • wireless device 2410 includes antenna 2411, interface 2414, processing circuitry 2420, device readable medium 2430, user interface equipment 2432, auxiliary equipment 2434, power source 2436 and power circuitry 2437.
  • WD 2410 can include multiple sets of one or more of the illustrated components for different wireless technologies supported by WD 2410, such as, for example, GSM, WCDMA, LTE, NR, WiFi, WiMAX, or Bluetooth wireless technologies, just to mention a few. These wireless technologies can be integrated into the same or different chips or set of chips as other components within WD 2410.
  • Antenna 2411 can include one or more antennas or antenna arrays, configured to send and/or receive wireless signals, and is connected to interface 2414.
  • antenna 2411 can be separate from WD 2410 and be connectable to WD 2410 through an interface or port.
  • Antenna 2411, interface 2414, and/or processing circuitry 2420 can be configured to perform any receiving or transmitting operations described herein as being performed by a WD. Any information, data and/or signals can be received from a network node and/or another WD.
  • radio front end circuitry and/or antenna 2411 can be considered an interface.
  • interface 2414 comprises radio front end circuitry 2412 and antenna 2411.
  • Radio front end circuitry 2412 comprise one or more filters 2418 and amplifiers 2416.
  • Radio front end circuitry 2414 is connected to antenna 2411 and processing circuitry 2420 and can be configured to condition signals communicated between antenna 2411 and processing circuitry 2420.
  • Radio front end circuitry 2412 can be coupled to or a part of antenna 2411.
  • WD 2410 may not include separate radio front end circuitry 2412; rather, processing circuitry 2420 can comprise radio front end circuitry and can be connected to antenna 2411.
  • some or all of RF transceiver circuitry 2422 can be considered a part of interface 2414.
  • Radio front end circuitry 2412 can receive digital data that is to be sent out to other network nodes or WDs via a wireless connection. Radio front end circuitry 2412 can convert the digital data into a radio signal having the appropriate channel and bandwidth parameters using a combination of filters 2418 and/or amplifiers 2416. The radio signal can then be transmitted via antenna 2411. Similarly, when receiving data, antenna 2411 can collect radio signals which are then converted into digital data by radio front end circuitry 2412. The digital data can be passed to processing circuitry 2420. In other embodiments, the interface can comprise different components and/or different combinations of components.
  • Processing circuitry 2420 can comprise a combination of one or more of a microprocessor, controller, microcontroller, central processing unit, digital signal processor, application-specific integrated circuit, field programmable gate array, or any other suitable computing device, resource, or combination of hardware, software, and/or encoded logic operable to provide WD 2410 functionality either alone or in combination with other WD 2410 components, such as device readable medium 2430.
  • a microprocessor controller, microcontroller, central processing unit, digital signal processor, application-specific integrated circuit, field programmable gate array, or any other suitable computing device, resource, or combination of hardware, software, and/or encoded logic operable to provide WD 2410 functionality either alone or in combination with other WD 2410 components, such as device readable medium 2430.
  • Such functionality can include any of the various wireless features or benefits discussed herein.
  • processing circuitry 2420 can execute instructions stored in device readable medium 2430 or in memory within processing circuitry 2420 to provide the functionality disclosed herein. More specifically, instructions (also referred to as a computer program product) stored in medium 2430 can include instructions that, when executed by processor 2420, can configure wireless device 2410 to perform operations corresponding to various exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) described herein. As illustrated, processing circuitry 2420 includes one or more of RF transceiver circuitry 2422, baseband processing circuitry 2424, and application processing circuitry 2426. In other embodiments, the processing circuitry can comprise different components and/or different combinations of components. In certain embodiments processing circuitry 2420 of WD 2410 can comprise a SOC.
  • RF transceiver circuitry 2422, baseband processing circuitry 2424, and application processing circuitry 2426 can be on separate chips or sets of chips. In alternative embodiments, part or all of baseband processing circuitry 2424 and application processing circuitry 2426 can be combined into one chip or set of chips, and RF transceiver circuitry 2422 can be on a separate chip or set of chips. In still alternative embodiments, part or all of RF transceiver circuitry 2422 and baseband processing circuitry 2424 can be on the same chip or set of chips, and application processing circuitry 2426 can be on a separate chip or set of chips.
  • part or all of RF transceiver circuitry 2422, baseband processing circuitry 2424, and application processing circuitry 2426 can be combined in the same chip or set of chips.
  • RF transceiver circuitry 2422 can be a part of interface 2414.
  • RF transceiver circuitry 2422 can condition RF signals for processing circuitry 2420.
  • processing circuitry 2420 executing instructions stored on device readable medium 2430, which in certain embodiments can be a computer-readable storage medium.
  • some or all of the functionality can be provided by processing circuitry 2420 without executing instructions stored on a separate or discrete device readable storage medium, such as in a hard-wired manner.
  • processing circuitry 2420 can be configured to perform the described functionality. The benefits provided by such functionality are not limited to processing circuitry 2420 alone or to other components of WD 2410, but are enjoyed by WD 2410 as a whole, and/or by end users and the wireless network generally.
  • Processing circuitry 2420 can be configured to perform any determining, calculating, or similar operations (e.g., certain obtaining operations) described herein as being performed by a WD. These operations, as performed by processing circuitry 2420, can include processing information obtained by processing circuitry 2420 by, for example, converting the obtained information into other information, comparing the obtained information or converted information to information stored by WD 2410, and/or performing one or more operations based on the obtained information or converted information, and as a result of said processing making a determination.
  • Device readable medium 2430 can be operable to store a computer program, software, an application including one or more of logic, rules, code, tables, etc. and/or other instructions capable of being executed by processing circuitry 2420.
  • Device readable medium 2430 can include computer memory (e.g . , Random Access Memory (RAM) or Read Only Memory (ROM)), mass storage media (e.g., a hard disk), removable storage media (e.g, a Compact Disk (CD) or a Digital Video Disk (DVD)), and/or any other volatile or non-volatile, non-transitory device readable and/or computer executable memory devices that store information, data, and/or instructions that can be used by processing circuitry 2420.
  • processing circuitry 2420 and device readable medium 2430 can be considered to be integrated.
  • User interface equipment 2432 can include components that allow and/or facilitate a human user to interact with WD 2410. Such interaction can be of many forms, such as visual, audial, tactile, etc. User interface equipment 2432 can be operable to produce output to the user and to allow and/or facilitate the user to provide input to WD 2410. The type of interaction can vary depending on the type of user interface equipment 2432 installed in WD 2410. For example, if WD 2410 is a smart phone, the interaction can be via a touch screen; if WD 2410 is a smart meter, the interaction can be through a screen that provides usage (e.g, the number of gallons used) or a speaker that provides an audible alert (e.g., if smoke is detected).
  • usage e.g., the number of gallons used
  • a speaker that provides an audible alert
  • User interface equipment 2432 can include input interfaces, devices and circuits, and output interfaces, devices and circuits. User interface equipment 2432 can be configured to allow and/or facilitate input of information into WD 2410 and is connected to processing circuitry 2420 to allow and/or facilitate processing circuitry 2420 to process the input information. User interface equipment 2432 can include, for example, a microphone, a proximity or other sensor, keys/buttons, a touch display, one or more cameras, a USB port, or other input circuitry. User interface equipment 2432 is also configured to allow and/or facilitate output of information from WD 2410, and to allow and/or facilitate processing circuitry 2420 to output information from WD 2410.
  • User interface equipment 2432 can include, for example, a speaker, a display, vibrating circuitry, a USB port, a headphone interface, or other output circuitry. Using one or more input and output interfaces, devices, and circuits, of user interface equipment 2432, WD 2410 can communicate with end users and/or the wireless network and allow and/or facilitate them to benefit from the functionality described herein.
  • Auxiliary equipment 2434 is operable to provide more specific functionality which may not be generally performed by WDs. This can comprise specialized sensors for doing measurements for various purposes, interfaces for additional types of communication such as wired communications etc. The inclusion and type of components of auxiliary equipment 2434 can vary depending on the embodiment and/or scenario.
  • Power source 2436 can, in some embodiments, be in the form of a battery or battery pack. Other types of power sources, such as an external power source (e.g., an electricity outlet), photovoltaic devices or power cells, can also be used.
  • WD 2410 can further comprise power circuitry 2437 for delivering power from power source 2436 to the various parts of WD 2410 which need power from power source 2436 to carry out any functionality described or indicated herein.
  • Power circuitry 2437 can in certain embodiments comprise power management circuitry. Power circuitry 2437 can additionally or alternatively be operable to receive power from an external power source; in which case WD 2410 can be connectable to the external power source (such as an electricity outlet) via input circuitry or an interface such as an electrical power cable. Power circuitry 2437 can also in certain embodiments be operable to deliver power from an external power source to power source 2436. This can be, for example, for the charging of power source 2436. Power circuitry 2437 can perform any converting or other modification to the power from power source 2436 to make it suitable for supply to the respective components of WD 2410.
  • Figure 25 illustrates one embodiment of a UE in accordance with various aspects described herein.
  • a user equipment or UE may not necessarily have a user in the sense of a human user who owns and/or operates the relevant device.
  • a UE can represent a device that is intended for sale to, or operation by, a human user but which may not, or which may not initially, be associated with a specific human user (e.g., a smart sprinkler controller).
  • a UE can represent a device that is not intended for sale to, or operation by, an end user but which can be associated with or operated for the benefit of a user (e.g, a smart power meter).
  • UE 25200 can be any UE identified by the 3 rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), including a NB-IoT UE, a machine type communication (MTC) UE, and/or an enhanced MTC (eMTC) UE.
  • UE 2500, as illustrated in Figure 25, is one example of a WD configured for communication in accordance with one or more communication standards promulgated by the 3 rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), such as 3GPP’s GSM, UMTS, LTE, and/or 5G standards.
  • 3GPP 3 rd Generation Partnership Project
  • the term WD and UE can be used interchangeable. Accordingly, although Figure 25 is a UE, the components discussed herein are equally applicable to a WD, and vice-versa.
  • UE 2500 includes processing circuitry 2501 that is operatively coupled to input/output interface 2505, radio frequency (RF) interface 2509, network connection interface 2511, memory 2515 including random access memory (RAM) 2517, read-only memory (ROM) 2519, and storage medium 2521 or the like, communication subsystem 2531, power source 2533, and/or any other component, or any combination thereof.
  • Storage medium 2521 includes operating system 2523, application program 2525, and data 2527. In other embodiments, storage medium 2521 can include other similar types of information.
  • Certain UEs can utilize all of the components shown in Figure 25, or only a subset of the components. The level of integration between the components can vary from one UE to another UE. Further, certain UEs can contain multiple instances of a component, such as multiple processors, memories, transceivers, transmitters, receivers, etc.
  • processing circuitry 2501 can be configured to process computer instructions and data.
  • Processing circuitry 2501 can be configured to implement any sequential state machine operative to execute machine instructions stored as machine-readable computer programs in the memory, such as one or more hardware-implemented state machines (e.g., in discrete logic, FPGA, ASIC, etc.); programmable logic together with appropriate firmware; one or more stored program, general-purpose processors, such as a microprocessor or Digital Signal Processor (DSP), together with appropriate software; or any combination of the above.
  • the processing circuitry 2501 can include two central processing units (CPUs). Data can be information in a form suitable for use by a computer.
  • input/output interface 2505 can be configured to provide a communication interface to an input device, output device, or input and output device.
  • UE 2500 can be configured to use an output device via input/output interface 2505.
  • An output device can use the same type of interface port as an input device.
  • a USB port can be used to provide input to and output from UE 2500.
  • the output device can be a speaker, a sound card, a video card, a display, a monitor, a printer, an actuator, an emitter, a smartcard, another output device, or any combination thereof.
  • UE 2500 can be configured to use an input device via input/output interface 2505 to allow and/or facilitate a user to capture information into UE 2500.
  • the input device can include a touch-sensitive or presence-sensitive display, a camera (e.g., a digital camera, a digital video camera, a web camera, etc.), a microphone, a sensor, a mouse, a trackball, a directional pad, a trackpad, a scroll wheel, a smartcard, and the like.
  • the presence- sensitive display can include a capacitive or resistive touch sensor to sense input from a user.
  • a sensor can be, for instance, an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a tilt sensor, a force sensor, a magnetometer, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor, another like sensor, or any combination thereof.
  • the input device can be an accelerometer, a magnetometer, a digital camera, a microphone, and an optical sensor.
  • RF interface 2509 can be configured to provide a communication interface to RF components such as a transmitter, a receiver, and an antenna.
  • Network connection interface 2511 can be configured to provide a communication interface to network 2543a.
  • Network 2543a can encompass wired and/or wireless networks such as a local-area network (LAN), a wide-area network (WAN), a computer network, a wireless network, a telecommunications network, another like network or any combination thereof.
  • network 2543a can comprise a Wi-Fi network.
  • Network connection interface 2511 can be configured to include a receiver and a transmitter interface used to communicate with one or more other devices over a communication network according to one or more communication protocols, such as Ethernet, TCP/IP, SONET, ATM, or the like.
  • Network connection interface 2511 can implement receiver and transmitter functionality appropriate to the communication network links (e.g., optical, electrical, and the like). The transmitter and receiver functions can share circuit components, software or firmware, or alternatively can be implemented separately.
  • RAM 2517 can be configured to interface via bus 2502 to processing circuitry 2501 to provide storage or caching of data or computer instructions during the execution of software programs such as the operating system, application programs, and device drivers.
  • ROM 2519 can be configured to provide computer instructions or data to processing circuitry 2501.
  • ROM 2519 can be configured to store invariant low-level system code or data for basic system functions such as basic input and output (I/O), startup, or reception of keystrokes from a keyboard that are stored in a non-volatile memory.
  • Storage medium 2521 can be configured to include memory such as RAM, ROM, programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), magnetic disks, optical disks, floppy disks, hard disks, removable cartridges, or flash drives.
  • memory such as RAM, ROM, programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), magnetic disks, optical disks, floppy disks, hard disks, removable cartridges, or flash drives.
  • storage medium 2521 can be configured to include operating system 2523; application program 2525 such as a web browser application, a widget or gadget engine or another application; and data file 2527.
  • Storage medium 2521 can store, for use by UE 2500, any of a variety of various operating systems or combinations of operating systems.
  • application program 2525 can include executable program instructions (also referred to as a computer program product) that, when executed by processor 2501, can configure UE 2500 to perform operations corresponding to various exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) described herein.
  • Storage medium 2521 can be configured to include a number of physical drive units, such as redundant array of independent disks (RAID), floppy disk drive, flash memory, USB flash drive, external hard disk drive, thumb drive, pen drive, key drive, high-density digital versatile disc (HD-DVD) optical disc drive, internal hard disk drive, Blu-Ray optical disc drive, holographic digital data storage (HDDS) optical disc drive, external mini-dual in-line memory module (DIMM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM), external micro- DIMM SDRAM, smartcard memory such as a subscriber identity module or a removable user identity (SIM/RUIM) module, other memory, or any combination thereof.
  • RAID redundant array of independent disks
  • HD-DVD high-density digital versatile disc
  • HDDS holographic digital data storage
  • DIMM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • smartcard memory such as a subscriber identity module or a removable user identity (SIM/RUIM) module, other memory, or any
  • Storage medium 2521 can allow and/or facilitate UE 2500 to access computer-executable instructions, application programs or the like, stored on transitory or non-transitory memory media, to off-load data, or to upload data.
  • An article of manufacture, such as one utilizing a communication system can be tangibly embodied in storage medium 2521, which can comprise a device readable medium.
  • processing circuitry 2501 can be configured to communicate with network 2543b using communication subsystem 2531.
  • Network 2543a and network 2543b can be the same network or networks or different network or networks.
  • Communication subsystem 2531 can be configured to include one or more transceivers used to communicate with network 2543b.
  • communication subsystem 2531 can be configured to include one or more transceivers used to communicate with one or more remote transceivers of another device capable of wireless communication such as another WD, UE, or base station of a radio access network (RAN) according to one or more communication protocols, such as IEEE 802.25, CDMA, WCDMA, GSM, LTE, UTRAN, WiMax, or the like.
  • RAN radio access network
  • Each transceiver can include transmitter 2533 and/or receiver 2535 to implement transmitter or receiver functionality, respectively, appropriate to the RAN links (e.g., frequency allocations and the like). Further, transmitter 2533 and receiver 2535 of each transceiver can share circuit components, software or firmware, or alternatively can be implemented separately.
  • the communication functions of communication subsystem 2531 can include data communication, voice communication, multimedia communication, short- range communications such as Bluetooth, near-field communication, location-based communication such as the use of the global positioning system (GPS) to determine a location, another like communication function, or any combination thereof.
  • communication subsystem 2531 can include cellular communication, Wi-Fi communication, Bluetooth communication, and GPS communication.
  • Network 2543b can encompass wired and/or wireless networks such as a local-area network (LAN), a wide-area network (WAN), a computer network, a wireless network, a telecommunications network, another like network or any combination thereof.
  • network 2543b can be a cellular network, a Wi-Fi network, and/or a near- field network.
  • Power source 2513 can be configured to provide alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) power to components of UE 2500.
  • communication subsystem 2531 can be configured to include any of the components described herein.
  • processing circuitry 2501 can be configured to communicate with any of such components over bus 2502.
  • any of such components can be represented by program instructions stored in memory that when executed by processing circuitry 2501 perform the corresponding functions described herein.
  • the functionality of any of such components can be partitioned between processing circuitry 2501 and communication subsystem 2531.
  • the non-computationally intensive functions of any of such components can be implemented in software or firmware and the computationally intensive functions can be implemented in hardware.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic block diagram illustrating a virtualization environment 2600 in which functions implemented by some embodiments can be virtualized.
  • virtualizing means creating virtual versions of apparatuses or devices which can include virtualizing hardware platforms, storage devices and networking resources.
  • virtualization can be applied to a node (e.g . , a virtualized base station or a virtualized radio access node) or to a device (e.g., a UE, a wireless device or any other type of communication device) or components thereof and relates to an implementation in which at least a portion of the functionality is implemented as one or more virtual components (e.g., via one or more applications, components, functions, virtual machines or containers executing on one or more physical processing nodes in one or more networks).
  • some or all of the functions described herein can be implemented as virtual components executed by one or more virtual machines implemented in one or more virtual environments 2600 hosted by one or more of hardware nodes 2630. Further, in embodiments in which the virtual node is not a radio access node or does not require radio connectivity (e.g., a core network node), then the network node can be entirely virtualized.
  • the virtual node is not a radio access node or does not require radio connectivity (e.g., a core network node)
  • the network node can be entirely virtualized.
  • the functions can be implemented by one or more applications 2620 (which can alternatively be called software instances, virtual appliances, network functions, virtual nodes, virtual network functions, etc.) operative to implement some of the features, functions, and/or benefits of some of the embodiments disclosed herein.
  • Applications 2620 are run in virtualization environment 2600 which provides hardware 2630 comprising processing circuitry 2660 and memory 2690.
  • Memory 2690 contains instructions 2695 executable by processing circuitry 2660 whereby application 2620 is operative to provide one or more of the features, benefits, and/or functions disclosed herein.
  • Virtualization environment 2600 can include general-purpose or special-purpose network hardware devices (or nodes) 2630 comprising a set of one or more processors or processing circuitry 2660, which can be commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) processors, dedicated Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), or any other type of processing circuitry including digital or analog hardware components or special purpose processors.
  • Each hardware device can comprise memory 2690-1 which can be non-persistent memory for temporarily storing instructions 2695 or software executed by processing circuitry 2660.
  • instructions 2695 can include program instructions (also referred to as a computer program product) that, when executed by processing circuitry 2660, can configure hardware node 2620 to perform operations corresponding to various exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) described herein. Such operations can also be attributed to virtual node(s) 2620 that is/are hosted by hardware node 2630.
  • Each hardware device can comprise one or more network interface controllers (NICs) 2670, also known as network interface cards, which include physical network interface 2680.
  • NICs network interface controllers
  • Each hardware device can also include non-transitory, persistent, machine-readable storage media 2690-2 having stored therein software 2695 and/or instructions executable by processing circuitry 2660.
  • Software 2695 can include any type of software including software for instantiating one or more virtualization layers 2650 (also referred to as hypervisors), software to execute virtual machines 2640 as well as software allowing it to execute functions, features and/or benefits described in relation with some embodiments described herein.
  • Virtual machines 2640 comprise virtual processing, virtual memory, virtual networking or interface and virtual storage, and can be run by a corresponding virtualization layer 2650 or hypervisor. Different embodiments of the instance of virtual appliance 2620 can be implemented on one or more of virtual machines 2640, and the implementations can be made in different ways.
  • processing circuitry 2660 executes software 2695 to instantiate the hypervisor or virtualization layer 2650, which can sometimes be referred to as a virtual machine monitor (VMM).
  • virtualization layer 2650 can present a virtual operating platform that appears like networking hardware to virtual machine 2640.
  • hardware 2630 can be a standalone network node with generic or specific components.
  • Hardware 2630 can comprise antenna 26225 and can implement some functions via virtualization.
  • hardware 2630 can be part of a larger cluster of hardware (e.g., such as in a data center or customer premise equipment (CPE)) where many hardware nodes work together and are managed via management and orchestration (MANO) 26100, which, among others, oversees lifecycle management of applications 2620.
  • CPE customer premise equipment
  • NFV network function virtualization
  • NFV can be used to consolidate many network equipment types onto industry standard high volume server hardware, physical switches, and physical storage, which can be located in data centers, and customer premise equipment.
  • virtual machine 2640 can be a software implementation of a physical machine that runs programs as if they were executing on a physical, non-virtualized machine.
  • Each of virtual machines 2640, and that part of hardware 2630 that executes that virtual machine be it hardware dedicated to that virtual machine and/or hardware shared by that virtual machine with others of the virtual machines 2640, forms a separate virtual network elements (VNE).
  • VNE virtual network elements
  • VNF Virtual Network Function
  • one or more radio units 26200 that each include one or more transmitters 26220 and one or more receivers 26210 can be coupled to one or more antennas 26225.
  • Radio units 26200 can communicate directly with hardware nodes 2630 via one or more appropriate network interfaces and can be used in combination with the virtual components to provide a virtual node with radio capabilities, such as a radio access node or a base station. Nodes arranged in this manner can also communicate with one or more UEs, such as described elsewhere herein.
  • control system 26230 can alternatively be used for communication between the hardware nodes 2630 and radio units 26200.
  • a communication system includes telecommunication network 2710, such as a 3GPP-type cellular network, which comprises access network 2711, such as a radio access network, and core network 2714.
  • Access network 2711 comprises a plurality of base stations 2712a, 2712b, 2712c, such as NBs, eNBs, gNBs or other types of wireless access points, each defining a corresponding coverage area 2713a, 2713b, 2713c.
  • Each base station 2712a, 2712b, 2712c is connectable to core network 2714 over a wired or wireless connection 2715.
  • a first UE 2791 located in coverage area 2713c can be configured to wirelessly connect to, or be paged by, the corresponding base station 2712c.
  • a second UE 2792 in coverage area 2713a is wirelessly connectable to the corresponding base station 2712a. While a plurality of UEs 2791, 2792 are illustrated in this example, the disclosed embodiments are equally applicable to a situation where a sole UE is in the coverage area or where a sole UE is connecting to the
  • Telecommunication network 2710 is itself connected to host computer 2730, which can be embodied in the hardware and/or software of a standalone server, a cloud-implemented server, a distributed server or as processing resources in a server farm.
  • Host computer 2730 can be under the ownership or control of a service provider or can be operated by the service provider or on behalf of the service provider.
  • Connections 2721 and 2722 between telecommunication network 2710 and host computer 2730 can extend directly from core network 2714 to host computer 2730 or can go via an optional intermediate network 2720.
  • Intermediate network 2720 can be one of, or a combination of more than one of, a public, private or hosted network; intermediate network 2720, if any, can be a backbone network or the Internet; in particular, intermediate network 2720 can comprise two or more sub-networks (not shown).
  • the communication system of Figure 27 as a whole enables connectivity between the connected UEs 2791, 2792 and host computer 2730.
  • the connectivity can be described as an over-the-top (OTT) connection 2750.
  • Host computer 2730 and the connected UEs 2791, 2792 are configured to communicate data and/or signaling via OTT connection 2750, using access network 2711, core network 2714, any intermediate network 2720 and possible further infrastructure (not shown) as intermediaries.
  • OTT connection 2750 can be transparent in the sense that the participating communication devices through which OTT connection 2750 passes are unaware of routing of uplink and downlink communications.
  • base station 2712 may not or need not be informed about the past routing of an incoming downlink communication with data originating from host computer 2730 to be forwarded (e.g., handed over) to a connected UE 2791. Similarly, base station 2712 need not be aware of the future routing of an outgoing uplink communication originating from the UE 2791 towards the host computer 2730.
  • host computer 2810 comprises hardware 2815 including communication interface 2816 configured to set up and maintain a wired or wireless connection with an interface of a different communication device of communication system 2800.
  • Host computer 2810 further comprises processing circuitry 2818, which can have storage and/or processing capabilities.
  • processing circuitry 2818 can comprise one or more programmable processors, application-specific integrated circuits, field programmable gate arrays or combinations of these (not shown) adapted to execute instructions.
  • Host computer 2810 further comprises software 2811, which is stored in or accessible by host computer 2810 and executable by processing circuitry 2818.
  • Software 2811 includes host application 2812.
  • Host application 2812 can be operable to provide a service to a remote user, such as UE 2830 connecting via OTT connection 2850 terminating at UE 2830 and host computer 2810. In providing the service to the remote user, host application 2812 can provide user data which is transmitted using OTT connection 2850.
  • Communication system 2800 can also include base station 2820 provided in a telecommunication system and comprising hardware 2825 enabling it to communicate with host computer 2810 and with UE 2830.
  • Hardware 2825 can include communication interface 2826 for setting up and maintaining a wired or wireless connection with an interface of a different communication device of communication system 2800, as well as radio interface 2827 for setting up and maintaining at least wireless connection 2870 with UE 2830 located in a coverage area (not shown in Figure 28) served by base station 2820.
  • Communication interface 2826 can be configured to facilitate connection 2860 to host computer 2810. Connection 2860 can be direct, or it can pass through a core network (not shown in Figure 28) of the telecommunication system and/or through one or more intermediate networks outside the telecommunication system.
  • hardware 2825 of base station 2820 can also include processing circuitry 2828, which can comprise one or more programmable processors, application-specific integrated circuits, field programmable gate arrays or combinations of these (not shown) adapted to execute instructions.
  • Base station 2820 also includes software 2821 stored internally or accessible via an external connection.
  • software 2821 can include program instructions (also referred to as a computer program product) that, when executed by processing circuitry 2828, can configure base station 2820 to perform operations corresponding to various exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) described herein.
  • Communication system 2800 can also include UE 2830 already referred to, whose hardware 2835 can include radio interface 2837 configured to set up and maintain wireless connection 2870 with a base station serving a coverage area in which UE 2830 is currently located.
  • Hardware 2835 of UE 2830 can also include processing circuitry 2838, which can comprise one or more programmable processors, application-specific integrated circuits, field programmable gate arrays or combinations of these (not shown) adapted to execute instructions.
  • UE 2830 also includes software 2831, which is stored in or accessible by UE 2830 and executable by processing circuitry 2838.
  • Software 2831 includes client application 2832.
  • Client application 2832 can be operable to provide a service to a human or non-human user via UE 2830, with the support of host computer 2810.
  • an executing host application 2812 can communicate with the executing client application 2832 via OTT connection 2850 terminating at UE 2830 and host computer 2810.
  • client application 2832 can receive request data from host application 2812 and provide user data in response to the request data.
  • OTT connection 2850 can transfer both the request data and the user data.
  • Client application 2832 can interact with the user to generate the user data that it provides.
  • Software 2831 can also include program instructions (also referred to as a computer program product) that, when executed by processing circuitry 2838, can configure UE 2830 to perform operations corresponding to various exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) described herein.
  • host computer 2810, base station 2820 and UE 2830 illustrated in Figure 28 can be similar or identical to host computer 2730, one of base stations 2712a, 2712b, 2712c and one of UEs 2791, 2792 of Figure 27, respectively.
  • the inner workings of these entities can be as shown in Figure 28 and independently, the surrounding network topology can be that of Figure 27.
  • OTT connection 2850 has been drawn abstractly to illustrate the communication between host computer 2810 and UE 2830 via base station 2820, without explicit reference to any intermediary devices and the precise routing of messages via these devices.
  • Network infrastructure can determine the routing, which it can be configured to hide from UE
  • OTT connection 2850 the network infrastructure can further take decisions by which it dynamically changes the routing (e.g., on the basis of load balancing consideration or reconfiguration of the network).
  • Wireless connection 2870 between UE 2830 and base station 2820 is in accordance with the teachings of the embodiments described throughout this disclosure.
  • One or more of the various embodiments improve the performance of OTT services provided to UE 2830 using OTT connection 2850, in which wireless connection 2870 forms the last segment.
  • the exemplary embodiments disclosed herein can improve flexibility for the network to monitor end- to-end quality-of-service (QoS) of data flows, including their corresponding radio bearers, associated with data sessions between a user equipment (UE) and another entity, such as an OTT data application or service external to the 5G network.
  • QoS quality-of-service
  • a measurement procedure can be provided for the purpose of monitoring data rate, latency and other network operational aspects on which the one or more embodiments improve.
  • the measurement procedure and/or the network functionality for reconfiguring OTT connection 2850 can be implemented in software 2811 and hardware 2815 of host computer 2810 or in software
  • sensors can be deployed in or in association with communication devices through which OTT connection 2850 passes; the sensors can participate in the measurement procedure by supplying values of the monitored quantities exemplified above, or supplying values of other physical quantities from which software 2811, 2831 can compute or estimate the monitored quantities.
  • the reconfiguring of OTT connection 2850 can include message format, retransmission settings, preferred routing etc:, the reconfiguring need not affect base station 2820, and it can be unknown or imperceptible to base station 2820. Such procedures and functionalities can be known and practiced in the art.
  • measurements can involve proprietary UE signaling facilitating host computer 2810’s measurements of throughput, propagation times, latency and the like.
  • the measurements can be implemented in that software 2811 and 2831 causes messages to be transmitted, in particular empty or ‘dummy’ messages, using OTT connection 2850 while it monitors propagation times, errors, etc.
  • FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) implemented in a communication system, in accordance with various embodiments.
  • the communication system includes a host computer, a base station and a UE which, in some exemplary embodiments, can be those described with reference to other figures herein. For simplicity of the present disclosure, only drawing references to Figure 29 will be included in this section.
  • the host computer provides user data.
  • substep 2911 (which can be optional) of step 2910, the host computer provides the user data by executing a host application.
  • the host computer initiates a transmission carrying the user data to the UE.
  • step 2930 the base station transmits to the UE the user data which was carried in the transmission that the host computer initiated, in accordance with the teachings of the embodiments described throughout this disclosure.
  • step 2940 the UE executes a client application associated with the host application executed by the host computer.
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) implemented in a communication system, in accordance with various embodiments.
  • the communication system includes a host computer, a base station and a UE which can be those described with reference to other figures herein. For simplicity of the present disclosure, only drawing references to Figure 30 will be included in this section.
  • the host computer provides user data.
  • the host computer provides the user data by executing a host application.
  • the host computer initiates a transmission carrying the user data to the UE.
  • the transmission can pass via the base station, in accordance with the teachings of the embodiments described throughout this disclosure.
  • the UE receives the user data carried in the transmission.
  • FIG 31 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) implemented in a communication system, in accordance with various embodiments.
  • the communication system includes a host computer, a base station and a UE which can be those described with reference to other figures herein. For simplicity of the present disclosure, only drawing references to Figure 31 will be included in this section.
  • step 3110 (which can be optional) the UE receives input data provided by the host computer. Additionally or alternatively, in step 3120, the UE provides user data. In substep 3121 (which can be optional) of step 3120, the UE provides the user data by executing a client application.
  • substep 3111 (which can be optional) of step 3110, the UE executes a client application which provides the user data in reaction to the received input data provided by the host computer.
  • the executed client application can further consider user input received from the user.
  • the UE initiates, in substep 3130 (which can be optional), transmission of the user data to the host computer.
  • step 3140 of the method the host computer receives the user data transmitted from the UE, in accordance with the teachings of the embodiments described throughout this disclosure.
  • FIG 32 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) implemented in a communication system, in accordance with various embodiments.
  • the communication system includes a host computer, a base station and a UE which can be those described with reference to other figures herein. For simplicity of the present disclosure, only drawing references to Figure 32 will be included in this section.
  • the base station receives user data from the UE.
  • the base station initiates transmission of the received user data to the host computer.
  • step 3230 (which can be optional)
  • the host computer receives the user data carried in the transmission initiated by the base station.
  • the term unit can have conventional meaning in the field of electronics, electrical devices and/or electronic devices and can include, for example, electrical and/or electronic circuitry, devices, modules, processors, memories, logic solid state and/or discrete devices, computer programs or instructions for carrying out respective tasks, procedures, computations, outputs, and/or displaying functions, and so on, as such as those that are described herein.
  • any appropriate steps, methods, features, functions, or benefits disclosed herein may be performed through one or more functional units or modules of one or more virtual apparatuses.
  • Each virtual apparatus may comprise a number of these functional units.
  • These functional units may be implemented via processing circuitry, which may include one or more microprocessor or microcontrollers, as well as other digital hardware, which may include Digital Signal Processor (DSPs), special-purpose digital logic, and the like.
  • the processing circuitry may be configured to execute program code stored in memory, which may include one or several types of memory such as Read Only Memory (ROM), Random Access Memory (RAM), cache memory, flash memory devices, optical storage devices, etc.
  • Program code stored in memory includes program instructions for executing one or more telecommunications and/or data communications protocols as well as instructions for carrying out one or more of the techniques described herein.
  • the processing circuitry may be used to cause the respective functional unit to perform corresponding functions according one or more embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • device and/or apparatus can be represented by a semiconductor chip, a chipset, or a (hardware) module comprising such chip or chipset; this, however, does not exclude the possibility that a functionality of a device or apparatus, instead of being hardware implemented, be implemented as a software module such as a computer program or a computer program product comprising executable software code portions for execution or being run on a processor.
  • functionality of a device or apparatus can be implemented by any combination of hardware and software.
  • a device or apparatus can also be regarded as an assembly of multiple devices and/or apparatuses, whether functionally in cooperation with or independently of each other.
  • devices and apparatuses can be implemented in a distributed fashion throughout a system, so long as the functionality of the device or apparatus is preserved. Such and similar principles are considered as known to a skilled person.
  • RNN radio access network node
  • QoE quality of experience
  • the first RNN is a centralized unit (CU) of a base station
  • the second RNN is a distributed unit (DU) of the base station
  • the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an intra-base station interface between the CU and the DU.
  • the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface; or the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
  • the first RNN is one of a master node (MN) or a secondary node (SN) in dual connectivity (DC) with the UE; and the second RNN is the other of the MN and the SN; and the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN.
  • MN master node
  • SN secondary node
  • DC dual connectivity
  • inter-base station interface is an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
  • A6 The method of any of embodiments A4-A5, wherein: the first RNN is a first centralized unit (CU) of one of the MN and SN; the second RNN is a second distributed unit (DU) of the other of the MN and SN; and the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU.
  • the first RNN is a first centralized unit (CU) of one of the MN and SN
  • the second RNN is a second distributed unit (DU) of the other of the MN and SN
  • the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU.
  • the method further comprises determining that there is no direct interface between the first and second RNNs; and forwarding the QoE measurement report comprises sending the QoE measurement report to a core network (CN) node connected to the first RNN.
  • CN core network
  • the first RNN is a gNB or an ng-eNB
  • the CN node is an AMF
  • the QoE measurement report is sent to the AMF via an NG interface
  • the first RNN is an eNB or en-gNB
  • the CN node is an MME
  • the QoE measurement report is sent to the MME via an SI interface.
  • RNN radio access network node
  • QoE quality of experience
  • the first RNN is a centralized unit (CU) of a base station
  • the second RNN is a distributed unit (DU) of the base station
  • the QoE measurement report is received via an intra-base station interface between the CU and the DU.
  • the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface; or the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
  • the first RNN is one of a master node (MN) or a secondary node (SN) in dual connectivity (DC) with the UE; and the second RNN is the other of the MN and the SN; and the QoE measurement report is received via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN.
  • MN master node
  • SN secondary node
  • DC dual connectivity
  • the first RNN is a first centralized unit (CU) of one of the MN and SN
  • the second RNN is a second distributed unit (DU) of the other of the MN and SN
  • the QoE measurement report is received via: an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU; and an intra-base station interface between the second CU and the second DU.
  • the second RNN is a gNB or an ng-eNB, the first and second CN nodes are first and second AMFs, and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces; or the second RNN is an eNB or en-gNB, the first and second CN nodes are first and second MMEs, and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces.
  • the second RNN is a centralized unit (CU) of a base station
  • the QoE measurement report is received by a CU control plane component (CU-CP)
  • adapting resource allocation in the cell comprises the following CU-CP operations: extracting, from the QoE measurement report, information related to one of the following associated with the UE: a PDU session, a bearer, and a data flow; and based on the extracted information, sending, to a user plane component of the CU (CU-UP), a request to perform one or more of the following: release the bearer and/or the PDU session, set up a new bearer and/or a new PDU session, change a QoS associated with the bearer or the data flow, change a scheduling priority of the UE, the bearer, and/or the data flow, change packet marking, temporarily disable data rate throttling, and temporarily ignore data volume caps associated with the UE’s subscription.
  • CU-CP CU control plane component
  • a method, for a core network (CN) node, for handling quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network comprising: receiving, from a UE via a first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell serving the UE; determining that the cell is served by a second RNN; and based on determining that the cell is served by the second RNN, sending the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
  • QoE quality of experience
  • determining that the cell is served by the second RNN is based on one of the following associated with the QoE measurement report: an identifier of the cell, an identifier of the second RNN, or an IP address of the second RNN.
  • the first and second RNNs are gNBs or ng-eNBs, the CN node is an AMF, and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces; or the first and second RNNs are eNBs or en-gNBs, the CN node is an MME, and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces.
  • the method further comprises determining that the second RNN is connected to a second CN node but not to the CN node; based on determining that the second RNN is connected to the second CN node, sending the QoE measurement report to the second RNN via an interface between the CN node and the second CN node.
  • a first radio access network node arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network
  • the first RNN comprising: communication interface circuitry configured to communicate with one or more UEs and with a second RNN in the wireless network; and processing circuitry operatively coupled to the communication interface circuitry, whereby the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are configured to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments A1-A8.
  • D3. A non-transitory, computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry of a first radio network node (RNN) arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, configure the first RNN to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments A1-A8.
  • a computer program product comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry of a first radio network node (RNN) arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, configure the first RNN to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments Al- A8.
  • RNN radio network node
  • QoE quality of experience
  • a second radio access network node arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network
  • the second RNN comprising: communication interface circuitry configured to communicate with one or more UEs and with a second RNN in the wireless network; and processing circuitry operatively coupled to the communication interface circuitry, whereby the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are configured to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments B1-B12.
  • a second radio network node arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, the second RNN being further arranged to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments B1-B12.
  • QoE quality of experience
  • a non-transitory, computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry of a second radio network node (RNN) arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, configure the second RNN to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments B1-B12.
  • RNN radio network node
  • QoE quality of experience
  • a computer program product comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry of a second radio network node (RNN) arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, configure the second RNN to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments B1-B12.
  • RNN radio network node
  • QoE quality of experience
  • a core network (CN) node arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network
  • the CN node comprising: communication interface circuitry configured to communicate with first and/or second radio access network nodes (RNNs) in the wireless network; and processing circuitry operatively coupled to the communication interface circuitry, whereby the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are configured to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments C1-C6.
  • a core network (CN) node arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, the CN node being further arranged to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments C1-C6.
  • QoE quality of experience
  • a non-transitory, computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry associated with a measurement function in a wireless network, configure the measurement function to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments C1-C6.
  • a computer program product comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry associated with a measurement function in a wireless network, configure the measurement function to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments C1-C6.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Embodiments include methods, for a first radio access network node, RNN, in a wireless network, for handling quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs. Such methods include receiving (2210), from a UE via a first cell, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a second cell and determining (2220) that the second cell is served by a second RNN. Such methods also include, based on determining that the second cell is served by the second RNN, forwarding (2240) the QoE measurement report to the second RNN. Other embodiments include complementary methods for a second RNN, for a core network, CN, node, and a UE, as well as RNNs, CN nodes, and UEs configured to perform such methods.

Description

QUALITY-OF-EXPERIENCE (QOE) REPORTING FOR RAN-BASED
QOE MANAGEMENT
TECHNICAL FIELD
The present invention generally relates to wireless communication networks and particularly relates to measuring end-user experience in wireless networks, also referred to as quality of experience (QoE).
BACKGROUND
Long-Term Evolution (LTE) is an umbrella term for so-called fourth-generation (4G) radio access technologies developed within the Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) and initially standardized in Release 8 (Rel-8) and Release 9 (Rel-9), also known as Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN). LTE is targeted at various licensed frequency bands and is accompanied by improvements to non-radio aspects commonly referred to as System Architecture Evolution (SAE), which includes Evolved Packet Core (EPC) network. LTE continues to evolve through subsequent releases.
An overall exemplary architecture of a network comprising LTE and SAE is shown in Figure 1. E-UTRAN 100 includes one or more evolved Node B’s (eNB), such as eNBs 105, 110, and 115, and one or more user equipment (UE), such as UE 120. As used within the 3GPP standards, “user equipment” or “UE” means any wireless communication device (e.g., smartphone or computing device) that is capable of communicating with 3GPP-standard-compliant network equipment, including E-UTRAN as well as UTRAN and/or GERAN, as the third-generation (“3G”) and second-generation (“2G”) 3GPP RANs are commonly known.
As specified by 3GPP, E-UTRAN 100 is responsible for all radio-related functions in the network, including radio bearer control, radio admission control, radio mobility control, scheduling, and dynamic allocation of resources to UEs in uplink and downlink, as well as security of the communications with the UE. These functions reside in the eNBs, such as eNBs 105, 110, and 115. Each of the eNBs can serve a geographic coverage area including one more cells, including cells 106, 111, and 115 served by eNBs 105, 110, and 115, respectively.
The eNBs in the E-UTRAN communicate with each other via the X2 interface, as shown in Figure 1. The eNBs also are responsible for the E-UTRAN interface to the EPC 130, specifically the SI interface to the Mobility Management Entity (MME) and the Serving Gateway (SGW), shown collectively as MME/S-GWs 134 and 138 in Figure 1. In general, the MME/S- GW handles both the overall control of the UE and data flow between the UE and the rest of the EPC. More specifically, the MME processes the signaling (e.g., control plane) protocols between the UE and the EPC, which are known as the Non-Access Stratum (NAS) protocols. The S-GW handles all Internet Protocol (IP) data packets (e.g., data or user plane) between the UE and the EPC and serves as the local mobility anchor for the data bearers when the UE moves between eNBs, such as eNBs 105, 110, and 115.
EPC 130 can also include aHome Subscriber Server (HSS) 131, which manages user- and subscriber-related information. HSS 131 can also provide support functions in mobility management, call and session setup, user authentication and access authorization. The functions of HSS 131 can be related to the functions of legacy Home Location Register (HLR) and Authentication Centre (AuC) functions or operations. HSS 131 can also communicate with MMEs 134 and 138 via respective S6a interfaces.
In some embodiments, HSS 131 can communicate with a user data repository (UDR) - labelled EPC-UDR 135 in Figure 1 - via a Ud interface. EPC-UDR 135 can store user credentials after they have been encrypted by AuC algorithms. These algorithms are not standardized (i.e., vendor-specific), such that encrypted credentials stored in EPC-UDR 135 are inaccessible by any other vendor than the vendor of HSS 131.
Figure 2 illustrates an exemplary control plane (CP) protocol stack between a UE, the E- UTRAN (e.g., an eNB), and the EPC (e.g., an MME). The exemplary protocol stack includes Physical (PHY), Medium Access Control (MAC), Radio Link Control (RLC), Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP), and Radio Resource Control (RRC) layers between the UE and eNB. The PHY layer is concerned with how and what characteristics are used to transfer data over transport channels on the LTE radio interface. The MAC layer provides data transfer services on logical channels, maps logical channels to PHY transport channels, and reallocates PHY resources to support these services. The RLC layer provides error detection and/or correction, concatenation, segmentation, and reassembly, reordering of data transferred to or from the upper layers. The PDCP layer provides ciphering/deciphering and integrity protection for both CP and user plane (UP), as well as other UP functions such as header compression. The exemplary protocol stack also includes non-access stratum (NAS) signaling between the UE and the MME.
The RRC layer controls communications between a UE and an eNB at the radio interface, as well as the mobility of a UE between cells in the E-UTRAN. After a UE is powered ON it will be in the RRC IDLE state until an RRC connection is established with the network, at which time the UE will transition to RRC_CONNECTED state (e.g. where data transfer can occur). The UE returns to RRCJEDLE after the connection with the network is released. In RRC_ IDLE state, the UE does not belong to any cell, no RRC context has been established for the UE (e.g., in E- UTRAN), and the UE is out of UL synchronization with the network. Even so, a UE in RRC_IDLE state is known in the EPC and has an assigned IP address. Furthermore, in RRC IDLE state, the UEs radio is active on a discontinuous reception (DRX) schedule configured by upper layers. During DRX active periods (also referred to as “DRX On durations”), an RRCJEDLE UE receives system information (SI) broadcast by a serving ceil, performs measurements of neighbor cells to support cell reseiection, and monitors a paging channel for pages from the EPC via an eNB serving the cell in which the UE is camping.
A UE must perform a random-access (RA) procedure to move from RRC IDLE to RRC CONNECTED state. In RRC CONNECTED state, the cell serving the UE is known and an RRC context is established for the UE in the serving eNB, such that the UE and eNB can communicate. For example, a Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI) - a UE identity used for signaling between UE and network - is configured for a UE in RRC CONNECTED state.
Logical channel communications between a UE and an eNB are via radio bearers. Since LTE Rel- 8, signaling radio bearers (SRBs) SRBO, SRBl, and SRB2 have been available for the transport of RRC and NAS messages. SRBO is used for RRC connection setup, RRC connection resume, and RRC connection re-establishment. Once any of these operations has succeeded, SRBl is used for handling RRC messages (which may include a piggybacked NAS message) and for NAS messages prior to establishment of SRB2. SRB2 is used for NAS messages and lower- priority RRC messages (e.g., logged measurement information). SRBO and SRBl are also used for establishment and modification of data radio bearers (DRBs) for carrying user data between the UE and eNB.
3GPP Rel- 10 supports bandwidths larger than 20 MHz. One important Rel- 10 requirement is backward compatibility with Rel-8. As such, a wideband LTE Rel-10 carrier (e.g., >20 MHz) should appear as a plurality of carriers (“component carriers” or CCs) to a Rel-8 (“legacy”) terminal. Legacy terminals can be scheduled in all parts of the wideband Rel-10 carrier. One way to achieve this is by Carrier Aggregation (CA), whereby a Rel-10 terminal can receive multiple CCs, each preferably having the same structure as a Rel-8 carrier.
LTE dual connectivity (DC) was introduced in Rel- 12. In DC operation, a UE in RRC CONNECTED state consumes radio resources provided by at least two different network points connected to one another with anon-ideal backhaul. In LTE, these two network points may be referred to as a “Master eNB” (MeNB) and a “Secondary eNB” (SeNB). More generally, master node (MN), anchor node, and MeNB can be used interchangeably, and the terms secondary node (SN), booster node, and SeNB can be used interchangeably. DC can be viewed as a special case of CA, in which the aggregated carriers (or cells) are provided by network nodes that are physically separated and not connected via a robust, high-capacity connection.
More specifically, in DC, the UE is configured with a Master Cell Group (MCG) associated with the MN and a Secondary Cell Group (SCG) associated with the SN. Each of the CGs is a group of serving cells that includes one MAC entity, a set of logical channels with associated RLC entities, a primary cell (PCell), and optionally one or more secondary cells (SCells). The term “Special Cell” (or “SpCell” for short) refers to the PCell of the MCG or the PSCell of the SCG depending on whether the UE’s MAC entity is associated with the MCG or the SCG, respectively. In non-DC operation (e.g., CA), SpCell refers to the PCell. An SpCell is always activated and supports physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) transmission and contention-based random access by UEs.
The MN provides system information (SI) and terminates the control plane connection towards the UE and, as such, is the controlling node of the UE, including handovers to and from SNs. For example, the MN terminates the connection between the eNB and the Mobility Management Entity (MME) for the UE. An SN provides additional radio resources (e.g., bearers) for radio resource bearers include MCG bearers, SCG bearers, and split bearers that have resources from both MCG and SCG. The reconfiguration, addition, and removal of SCells can be performed by RRC. When adding a new SCell, dedicated RRC signaling is used to send the UE all required SI of the SCell, such that UEs need not acquire SI directly from the SCell broadcast. It is also possible to support CA in either or both of MCG and SCG. In other words, either or both of the MCG and the SCG can include multiple cells working in CA.
Quality of Experience (QoE) measurements have been specified for UEs operating in LTE networks and in earlier-generation UMTS networks. Measurements in both networks operate according to the same high-level principles. Their purpose is to measure the experience of end users when using certain applications over a network. For example, QoE measurements for streaming services and for MTSI (Mobility Telephony Service for IMS) are supported in LTE.
RRC signaling is used to configure application layer measurements in UEs and to collect QoE measurement result files from the configured UEs. In particular, application layer measurement configuration from the core network (e.g., EPC) or a network operations/ administration/maintenance (OAM) function is encapsulated in a transparent container and sent to the serving eNB, which forwards it to a UE in an RRC message. Application layer measurements made by the UE are encapsulated in a transparent container and sent to the serving eNB in an RRC message. The serving eNB then forwards the container to a Trace Collector Entity (TCE) or a Measurement Collection Entity (MCE) associated with the EPC.
Currently the fifth generation (“5G”) of cellular systems, also referred to as New Radio (NR), is being standardized within the Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP). NR is developed for maximum flexibility to support a variety of different use cases. These include enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB), machine type communications (MTC), ultra-reliable low latency communications (URLLC), side-link device-to-device (D2D), and several other use cases. 5G/NR technology shares many similarities with fourth-generation LTE. For example, both PHYs utilize similar arrangements of time-domain physical resources into 1-ms subframes that include multiple slots of equal duration, with each slot including multiple OFDM-based symbols. As another example, NR RRC layer includes RRC IDLE and RRC CONNECTED states, but adds another state known as RRC INACTIVE. In addition to providing coverage via “cells,” as in LTE, NR networks also provide coverage via “beams.” In general, a DL “beam” is a coverage area of a network-transmitted RS that may be measured or monitored by a UE.
DC is also envisioned as an important feature for 5 G/NR networks. Several DC (or more generally, multi-connectivity) scenarios have been considered for NR. These include NR-DC that is similar to LTE-DC discussed above, except that both the MN and SN (referred to as “gNBs”) employ the NR interface to communicate with the UE. In addition, various multi-RAT DC (MR-DC) scenarios have been considered, whereby a compatible UE can be configured to utilize resources provided by two different nodes, one providing E-UTRA/LTE access and the other one providing NR access. One node acts as the MN (e.g., providing MCG) and the other as the SN (e.g., providing SCG), with the MN and SN being connected via a network interface and at least the MN being connected to a core network (e.g., EPC or 5GC).
QoE measurements will also be needed for UEs operating in NR networks, including in MR-DC operation. However, the existing framework for QoE measurements does not address the various options and/or complexities of a UE’s connectivity with networks that include both LTE and NR. Furthermore, the existing framework does not provide the level of granularity and/or control for QoE measurements in these networks. Solutions to these problems, issues, and/or difficulties are needed.
SUMMARY
Embodiments of the present disclosure provide specific improvements to QoE measurements in a wireless network, such as by facilitating solutions to overcome exemplary problems summarized above and described in more detail below.
Embodiments of the present disclosure include methods (e.g., procedures) for handling quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network. These exemplary methods can be performed by a first radio access network node (RNN, e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc. , or component thereoi) in the wireless network (e.g., E-UTRAN, NG-RAN).
These exemplary methods can include receiving, from a UE via a first cell, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a second cell. These exemplary methods can also include determining that the second cell is served by a second RNN. These exemplary methods can also include, based on determining that the second cell is served by the second RNN, forwarding the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
In some embodiments, the first cell uses a first radio access technology (RAT) and one of the following applies: the second cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT, or the second cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE.
In some embodiments, the QoE measurement report also includes further application-layer QoE measurements associated with the first cell. In other embodiments, the application-layer QoE measurements are associated with the second cell and the first cell.
In some embodiments, the first RNN is a centralized unit (CU) of a base station, the second RNN is a distributed unit (DU) of the base station, and the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an intra-base station interface between the CU and the DU. In some embodiments, the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface. In other embodiments, the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
In other embodiments, the first RNN is one of a master node (MN) or a secondary node (SN) in dual connectivity (DC) with the UE, and the second RNN is the other of the MN and the SN. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN. For example, the inter-base station interface can be an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
In other embodiments, the first RNN is a first CU of one of an MN and an SN in DC with the UE, and the second RNN is a second DU of the other of the MN and SN. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU. For example, the inter-base station interface can be an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
In some embodiments, these exemplary methods can also include determining whether there is a direct inter-base station interface between the first and second RNNs. In such embodiments, the forwarding operation can include, based on determining that there is no direct inter-base station interface between the first RNN and the second RNN, sending the QoE measurement report to a core network (CN) node connected to the first RNN for forwarding to the second RNN. In some of these embodiments, the QoE measurement report is sent to the CN node in a request to enable modifications of resources for an established protocol data unit (PDU) session for the UE.
In some of these embodiments, the CN node is an access and mobility management function (AMF) and the QoE measurement report is forwarded to the AMF via an NG interface. In other of these embodiments, the CN node is a mobility management entity (MME) and the QoE measurement report is forwarded to the MME via an SI interface. Other embodiments include additional methods (e.g., procedures) for handling QoE measurements by UEs in a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure. These exemplary methods can be performed by a second RNN (e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc. , or component thereof) in the wireless network (e.g, E-UTRAN, NG-RAN).
These exemplary methods can include receiving, from a UE via a first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell served by the second RNN. These exemplary methods can also include, based on the QoE measurement report, adapting resource allocation associated with at least one of the cell and the UE. In some embodiments, adapting the resource allocation can be further based on radio link measurements, for the cell, that are received by the second RNN from UEs served by the cell.
In some embodiments, the first cell uses a first RAT and one of the following applies: the second cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT, or the second cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE.
In some embodiments, the QoE measurement report also includes further application-layer QoE measurements associated with the first cell. In other embodiments, the application-layer QoE measurements are associated with the second cell and the first cell.
In some embodiments, the first RNN is a CU of a base station, the second RNN is a DU of the base station, and the QoE measurement report is received via an intra-base station interface between the CU and the DU. In some embodiments, the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface. In other embodiments, the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
In other embodiments, the first RNN is one of an MN or an SN in DC with the UE, and the second RNN is the other of the MN and the SN. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is received via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN. For example, the inter-base station interface can be an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
In other embodiments, the first RNN is a first CU of one of an MN and an SN in DC with the UE, and the second RNN is a second DU of the other of the MN and SN. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is received via an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU, and via an intra-base station interface between the second CU and the second DU. In some of these embodiments, the inter-base station interface is an Xn interface or an X2 interface. In some of these embodiments, the intra-base station interface is an FI interface or a W1 interface.
In other embodiments, there is no direct inter-base interface between the first and second RNNs. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is received via a first interface between the first RNN and a first CN node and via a second interface between the second RNN and either the first CN node or a second CN node. In some of these embodiments, the first and second CN nodes are first and second AMFs, and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces. In other of these embodiments, the first and second CN nodes are first and second MMEs, and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces.
In some of these embodiments, the first and second CN nodes are the same (e.g., a single CN node, such as an AMF). In such case, the second interface is between the second RNN and the first CN node. In other of these embodiments, the first and second CN nodes are different, the second interface is between the second RNN and the second CN node, and the QoE measurement report is also received via a third interface between the first and second CN nodes.
In other embodiments, the second RNN is a CU of a base station and the QoE measurement report is received by a control plane component of the CU (CU-CP). In such embodiments, adapting the resource allocation can include extracting, from the QoE measurement report, information related to one of the following associated with the UE: a PDU session, a bearer, and a data flow; and based on the extracted information, sending to a user plane component of the CU (CU-UP) a request to perform one or more of the following operations:
• release the bearer and/or the PDU session;
• set up a new bearer and/or a new PDU session,
• change a quality-of-service associated with the bearer or the data flow,
• change a scheduling priority of the UE, the bearer, and/or the data flow,
• change packet marking,
• temporarily disable data rate throttling, and
• temporarily ignore data volume caps associated with the UE’s subscription.
Other embodiments include exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) for handling quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network. These exemplary methods can be performed by a CN node (e.g., MME, AMF, etc.) associated with a radio access network (RAN, e.g., E-UTRAN, NG-RAN).
These exemplary methods can include receiving, from a UE via a first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell serving the UE. These exemplary methods can also include determining that the cell is served by a second RNN. These exemplary methods can also include, based on determining that the cell is served by the second RNN, sending the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
In some embodiments, the first RNN uses a first RAT and one of the following applies: the cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT, or the cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE. In some embodiments, determining that the cell is served by the second RNN is based on one of the following associated with the QoE measurement report: an identifier of the cell, an identifier of the second RNN, or an IP address of the second RNN.
In some embodiments, there is no direct inter-base interface between the first and second RNNs. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is received via a first interface between the first RNN and the CN node, and the QoE measurement report is sent via a second interface between the second RNN and the CN node. In some of these embodiments, the CN node is an AMF and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces. In other of these embodiments, the CN node is an MME and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces.
In some embodiments, these exemplary methods can also include determining whether the second RNN is connected to at least one of the CN node and a second CN node. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is sent to the second RNN via a third interface between the CN node and the second CN node based on determining that the second RNN is connected to the second CN node but not to the CN node. In some of these embodiments, the CN node and the second CN node are AMFs and the third interface is an N14 interface. In other of these embodiments, one of the CN node and the second CN node is an AMF, the other of the CN node and the second CN node is an MME, and the third interface is an N26 interface.
Other embodiments include exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) for performing quality of experience (QoE) measurements in a wireless network. These exemplary methods can be performed by a UE (e.g., wireless device, IoT device, etc.).
These exemplary methods can include, while operating in a first cell of the wireless network that uses a first RAT, initiating QoE measurements for one or more services provided by the UE application layer. These exemplary methods can also include subsequently performing one or more mobility procedures towards other cells of the wireless network. The one or more mobility operations include at least one of the following:
• handover from a cell that uses the first RAT towards another cell that uses a different RAT than the first RAT; and
• addition of connectivity via another cell served by a different network node than the first cell.
These exemplary methods can also include sending, to the wireless network, one or more QoE measurement reports including QoE measurements performed by the UE in at least the first cell.
In some embodiments, the one or more mobility procedures comprise a handover from the first cell to a second cell uses the different RAT and the one or more QoE measurement reports include a single QoE measurement report sent via the second cell. In some of these embodiments, the exemplary method can also include one of the following: continuing the QoE measurements in the second cell, wherein the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed in the first cell and the second cell; or stopping the QoE measurements in the second cell, wherein the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed only in the first cell.
In other embodiments, the one or more mobility procedures comprise a first handover from the first cell to a third cell that uses the different RAT, and a second handover from the third cell to a second cell that uses the first RAT. In such embodiments, the one or more QoE measurement reports comprise a single QoE measurement report sent via the second cell. In some of these embodiments, these exemplary methods can also include one of the following: continuing the QoE measurements in the third cell, wherein the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed in the first cell and the third cell; or stopping the QoE measurements in the third cell, wherein the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed only in the first cell.
In other embodiments, the one or more mobility procedures comprise addition of connectivity to the wireless network via a second cell served by a different network node than the first cell. The second cell can either use the first RAT or the different RAT. Upon addition of the connectivity via the second cell, communication of data for the one or more services (i.e., for which the QoE measurements are performed) is according to one of the following: via the second cell only, non-overlapping portions of the data via the first and second cells, or duplicated via both the first and second cells.
In some of these embodiments, these exemplary methods can also include continuing the QoE measurements in the second cell. In such embodiments, the one or more QoE measurement reports include one of the following:
• a single QoE measurement report including the QoE measurements performed in the first and second cells and sent via the first cell;
• a single QoE measurement report including the QoE measurements performed in the first and second cells and sent via the second cell;
• first and second QoE measurement reports including the QoE measurements performed in the respective first and second cells and sent via the respective first and second cells; or
• first and second QoE measurement report sent via the respective first and second cells, each QoE measurement report including the QoE measurements performed in both the first and second cells.
In other of these embodiments, the exemplary method can also include stopping the QoE measurements in the second cell. In such embodiments, the one or more QoE measurement reports include a first QoE measurement report including measurements performed only in the first cell and sent via the first cell. In a variant, these exemplary methods can also include restarting the stopped QoE measurements in the second cell. In this variant, the one or more QoE measurement reports also include a second QoE measurement report including measurements performed only in the second cell and sent via the second cell.
Other embodiments include first and second RNNs (e.g., base stations, eNBs, gNBs, ng- eNBs, en-gNBs, CUs, DUs, etc., or components thereof), CN nodes (e.g., MMEs, AMFs, etc.), and UEs (e.g., wireless devices, IoT devices, etc.) configured to perform operations corresponding to any of the exemplary methods described herein. Other embodiments include non-transitory, computer-readable media storing program instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry, configure such RNNs, CN nodes, and UEs to perform operations corresponding to any of the exemplary methods described herein.
These and other objects, features, and advantages of embodiments of the present disclosure will become apparent upon reading the following Detailed Description in view of the Drawings briefly described below.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Figure 1 is a high-level block diagram of an exemplary architecture of the Long-Term Evolution (LTE) Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN) and Evolved Packet Core (EPC) network, as standardized by 3 GPP.
Figure 2 illustrates an exemplary control plane (CP) protocol stack between a UE, the E- UTRAN, and the EPC.
Figures 3-4 illustrate various aspects of dual connectivity (DC) in an LTE network.
Figure 5 shows a high-level view of an exemplary 5G network architecture.
Figures 6-7 show high-level views of exemplary network architectures that support multi- RAT DC (MR-DC) using EPC and 5G Core (5GC), respectively.
Figure 8 is a block diagram showing a high-level comparison of EN-DC, NE-DC, and NGEN-DC options.
Figure 9 illustrates an exemplary SN Addition procedure for MR-DC utilizing a 5GC.
Figure 10 illustrates an exemplary MN-initiated SN Release procedure for MR-DC utilizing a 5GC.
Figure 11-12 illustrate exemplary MN- and SN-initiated SN Change procedures, respectively, for MR-DC utilizing a 5GC.
Figures 13A-D show various procedures between a UTRAN and a UE for QoE measurements in a legacy UMTS network.
Figures 14A-C illustrate various aspects of QoE measurement configuration for a UE in an LTE network. Figures 15A-C illustrate various aspects of QoE measurement collection for a UE in an LTE network.
Figure 16 shows a more detailed signal flow of activation of QoE measurement collection and reporting of collected information for a UE in an LTE network.
Figures 17-21 show exemplary signal flow diagrams of various procedures for handling QoE measurements reports in a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
Figure 22 is a flow diagram of an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for a first RAN node (RNN, e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc., or component thereol), according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
Figure 23 is a flow diagram of an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for a second RNN (e.g, base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc., or component thereol), according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
Figure 24 illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
Figure 25 illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a UE, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
Figure 26 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary virtualization environment usable for implementation of various embodiments of network nodes described herein.
Figures 27-28 are block diagrams of various exemplary communication systems and/or networks, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
Figures 29-32 are flow diagrams of exemplary methods for transmission and/or reception of user data, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
Figure 33 is a flow diagram of an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for a core network node (e.g., MME, AMF, etc.), according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
Figure 34 is a flow diagram of an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for a UE (e.g., wireless device, IoT device, etc.), according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
Some of the embodiments contemplated herein will now be described more fully with reference to the accompanying drawings. Other embodiments, however, are contained within the scope of the subject matter disclosed herein, the disclosed subject matter should not be construed as limited to only the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided by way of example to convey the scope of the subject matter to those skilled in the art.
Generally, all terms used herein are to be interpreted according to their ordinary meaning in the relevant technical field, unless a different meaning is clearly given and/or is implied from the context in which it is used. All references to a/an/the element, apparatus, component, means, step, etc. are to be interpreted openly as referring to at least one instance of the element, apparatus, component, means, step, etc., unless explicitly stated otherwise. The steps of any methods disclosed herein do not have to be performed in the exact order disclosed, unless a step is explicitly described as following or preceding another step and/or where it is implicit that a step must follow or precede another step. Any feature of any of the embodiments disclosed herein may be applied to any other embodiment, wherever appropriate. Likewise, any advantage of any of the embodiments may apply to any other embodiments, and vice versa. Other objectives, features, and advantages of the enclosed embodiments will be apparent from the following description. Furthermore, the following terms are used throughout the description given below:
• Radio Node: As used herein, a “radio node” can be either a “radio access node” or a “wireless device.”
• Radio Access Node: As used herein, a “radio access node” (or equivalently “radio network node,” “radio access network node,” or “RAN node”) can be any node in a radio access network (RAN) of a cellular communications network that operates to wirelessly transmit and/or receive signals. Some examples of a radio access node include, but are not limited to, a base station ( e.g ., a New Radio (NR) base station (gNB/en-gNB) in a 3GPP Fifth Generation (5G) NR network or an enhanced or evolved Node B (eNB/ng-eNB) in a 3GPP LTE network), base station distributed components (e.g., CU and DU), base station control- and/or user-plane components (e.g., CU-CP, CU-UP), ahigh-power or macro base station, a low-power base station (e.g., micro, pico, femto, or home base station, or the like), an integrated access backhaul (IAB) node, a transmission point, a remote radio unit (RRU or RRH), and a relay node.
• Core Network Node: As used herein, a “core network node” is any type of node in a core network. Some examples of a core network node include, e.g., a Mobility Management Entity (MME), a serving gateway (SGW), a Packet Data Network Gateway (P-GW), an access and mobility management function (AMF), a session management function (AMF), a user plane function (UPF), a Service Capability Exposure Function (SCEF), or the like.
• Wireless Device: As used herein, a “wireless device” (or “WD” for short) is any type of device that has access to (i.e., is served by) a cellular communications network by communicate wirelessly with network nodes and/or other wireless devices. Communicating wirelessly can involve transmitting and/or receiving wireless signals using electromagnetic waves, radio waves, infrared waves, and/or other types of signals suitable for conveying information through air. Some examples of a wireless device include, but are not limited to, smart phones, mobile phones, cell phones, voice over IP (VoIP) phones, wireless local loop phones, desktop computers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), wireless cameras, gaming consoles or devices, music storage devices, playback appliances, wearable devices, wireless endpoints, mobile stations, tablets, laptops, laptop- embedded equipment (LEE), laptop-mounted equipment (LME), smart devices, wireless customer-premise equipment (CPE), mobile-type communication (MTC) devices, Intemet-of-Things (IoT) devices, vehicle-mounted wireless terminal devices, etc. Unless otherwise noted, the term “wireless device” is used interchangeably herein with the term “user equipment” (or “UE” for short).
• Network Node: As used herein, a “network node” is any node that is either part of the radio access network ( e.g ., a radio access node or equivalent name discussed above) or of the core network (e.g., a core network node discussed above) of a cellular communications network. Functionally, a network node is equipment capable, configured, arranged, and/or operable to communicate directly or indirectly with a wireless device and/or with other network nodes or equipment in the cellular communications network, to enable and/or provide wireless access to the wireless device, and/or to perform other functions (e.g., administration) in the cellular communications network.
Note that the description herein focuses on a 3GPP cellular communications system and, as such, 3GPP terminology or terminology similar to 3GPP terminology is oftentimes used. However, the concepts disclosed herein are not limited to a 3GPP system. Furthermore, although the term “cell” is used herein, it should be understood that (particularly with respect to 5G NR) beams may be used instead of cells and, as such, concepts described herein apply equally to both cells and beams.
As briefly mentioned above, the existing framework for QoE measurements does not address the various options and/or complexities of a UE’s connectivity with networks that include both LTE and NR. Furthermore, the existing framework does not provide the level of granularity and/or control for QoE measurements in these networks. This is discussed in more detail below, after the following description of NR network architecture and various DC features and/or architectures.
Figure 3 shows an aggregated user plane (UP) protocol stack for LTE DC, while Figure 4A shows the inter-eNB connectivity for LTE DC UP. The UP aggregation shown in Figure 3 achieves benefits such as increasing the throughput for users with good channel conditions and the capability of receiving and transmitting at higher data rates than can be supported by a single node, even without a low-latency backhaul connection between MeNB/MN and SeNB/SN.
As shown in Figure 3, the LTE DC UP includes three different types of bearers. MCG bearers are terminated in the MN, and the Sl-U connection for the corresponding bearer(s) to the S-GW is terminated in the MN (shown in Figure 4A). The SN is not involved in the transport of UP data for MCG bearers. Likewise, SCG bearers are terminated in the SN, which can be directly connected with the S-GW via Sl-U (as shown in Figure 4A). The MN is not involved in the transport of UP data for SCG bearers. An Sl-U connection between S-GW and SN is only present if SCG bearers are configured. Finally, split bearers are also terminated in the MN, with PDCP data being transferred between MN and SN via X2-U interface (shown in Figure 4A). Both SN and MN are involved in transmitting data for split bearers.
Figure 4B shows the inter-eNB CP connectivity for LTE DC. In this arrangement, all MME signaling is carried over the MeNB’s Sl-MME interface to the MME, with the SeNB’s signaling also carried over the X2-C interface with the MeNB. The network’s RRC connection with the UE is handled only by the MeNB, such that SRBs are always configured as MCG bearer type and only use radio resources of the MeNB. However, the MeNB can also configure the UE based on input from the SeNB and, in this manner, the SeNB can indirectly control the UE.
Figure 5 illustrates a high-level view of the 5G network architecture, consisting of a Next Generation RAN (NG-RAN) 599 and a 5G Core (5GC) 598. NG-RAN 599 can include a set of gNodeB’s (gNBs) connected to the 5GC via one or more NG interfaces, such as gNBs 500, 550 connected via interfaces 502, 552, respectively. In addition, the gNBs can be connected to each other via one or more Xn interfaces, such as Xn interface 540 between gNBs 500 and 550. With respect the NR interface to UEs, each of the gNBs can support frequency division duplexing (FDD), time division duplexing (TDD), or a combination thereof.
NG-RAN 599 is layered into a Radio Network Layer (RNL) and a Transport Network Layer (TNL). The NG-RAN architecture, i.e., the NG-RAN logical nodes and interfaces between them, is defined as part of the RNL. For each NG-RAN interface (NG, Xn, FI) the related TNL protocol and the functionality are specified. The TNL provides services for user plane transport and signaling transport. In some exemplary configurations, each gNB is connected to all 5GC nodes within an “AMF Region,” which is defined in 3GPP TS 23.501. If security protection for CP and UP data on TNL of NG-RAN interfaces is supported, NDS/IP shall be applied.
The NG RAN logical nodes shown in Figure 5 include a central (or centralized) unit (CU or gNB-CU) and one or more distributed (or decentralized) units (DU or gNB-DU). For example, gNB 500 includes gNB-CU 510 and gNB-DUs 520 and 540. CUs (e.g, gNB-CU 510) are logical nodes that host higher-layer protocols and perform various gNB functions such controlling the operation of DUs. Each DU is a logical node that hosts lower-layer protocols and can include, depending on the functional split, various subsets of the gNB functions. As such, each of the CUs and DUs can include various circuitry needed to perform their respective functions, including processing circuitry, transceiver circuitry (e.g., for communication), and power supply circuitry. Moreover, the terms “central unit” and “centralized unit” are used interchangeably herein, as are the terms “distributed unit” and “decentralized unit.”
A gNB-CU connects to gNB-DUs over respective FI logical interfaces, such as interfaces 522 and 532 shown in Figure 5. The gNB-CU and connected gNB-DUs are only visible to other gNBs and the 5GC as a gNB. In other words, the FI interface is not visible beyond gNB-CU. In the gNB split CU-DU architecture illustrated by Figure 4, DC can be achieved by allowing a UE to connect to multiple DUs served by the same CU or by allowing a UE to connect to multiple DUs served by different CUs.
A gNB-CU can also be separated into a CU-CP function (including RRC and PDCP for signaling radio bearers) and CU-UP function (including PDCP for user plane), with the El open interface between (see 3GPP TS 38.463). The CU-CP and CU-UP parts communicate with each other using the El-AP protocol over the El interface. Three deployment scenarios for the split gNB architecture shown in Figure 2 are defined in 3GPP TR 38.806:
• Scenario 1 : CU-CP and CU-UP centralized;
• Scenario 2: CU-CP distributed and CU-UP centralized;
• Scenario 3: CU-CP centralized and CU-UP distributed.
DC is also envisioned as an important feature for 5G/NR networks. 3GPP TR 38.804 (v 14.0.0) describes various exemplary dual-connectivity (DC) scenarios or configurations in which the MN and SN can apply either NR RAT, LTE RAT, or both, and can connect to either EPC or 5GC. The following terminology is used to describe these exemplary DC scenarios or configurations:
• DC: LTE DC (i.e., both MN and SN employ LTE, as discussed above);
• EN-DC: LTE-NR DC where MN (eNB) employs LTE and SN (gNB) employs NR, and both are connected to EPC.
• NGEN-DC: LTE-NR dual connectivity where a UE is connected to one ng-eNB that acts as a MN and one gNB that acts as a SN. The ng-eNB is connected to the 5GC and the gNB is connected to the ng-eNB via the Xn interface.
• NE-DC: LTE-NR dual connectivity where a UE is connected to one gNB that acts as a MN and one ng-eNB that acts as a SN. The gNB is connected to 5GC and the ng-eNB is connected to the gNB via the Xn interface.
• NR-DC (or NR-NR DC): both MN and SN employ NR and connect to 5GC via NG. • MR-DC (multi-RAT DC): a generalization of the Intra-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity (DC) described in 3GPP TS 36.300 (vl6.0.0), where a multiple Rx/Tx UE may be configured to utilize resources provided by two different nodes connected via non-ideal backhaul, one providing E-UTRA access and the other one providing NR access. One node acts as the MN and the other as the SN, with one using LTE and the other using NR. The MN and SN are connected via a network interface and at least the MN is connected to the core network. EN-DC, NE-DC, and NGEN-DC are different example cases of MR-DC. Figure 6 shows a high-level view of an exemplary network architecture that supports EN- DC, including an E-UTRAN 699 and an EPC 698. As shown in the figure, E-UTRAN 699 can include en-gNBs 610 (e.g., 610a, b) and eNBs 620 (e.g, 620a, b) that are interconnected with each other via respective X2 (or X2-U) interfaces. The eNBs 620 can be similar to those shown in Figure 1, while the ng-eNBs can be similar to the gNBs shown in Figure 5 except that they connect to EPC 698 via an S 1 -U interface rather than to a 5GC via an X2 interface. The eNBs also connect to EPC 698 via an SI interface, similar to the arrangement shown in Figure 1. More specifically, en-gNBs 610 (e.g., 610a, b) and eNBs 620 (e.g, 620a, b) connect to MMEs (e.g, MMEs 630a, b) and S-GWs (e.g., S-GWs 640a, b) in EPC 698.
Each of the en-gNBs and eNBs can serve a geographic coverage area including one more cells, including cells 611a-b and 621a-b shown as exemplary in Figure 6. Depending on the particular cell in which it is located, a UE 605 can communicate with the en-gNB or eNB serving that particular cell via the NR or LTE radio interface, respectively. In addition, UE 605 can be in EN-DC connectivity with a first cell served by an eNB and a second cell served by an en-gNB, such as cells 620a and 610a shown in Figure 6.
Figure 7 shows a high-level view of an exemplary network architecture that supports MR- DC configurations based on a 5GC. More specifically, Figure 7 shows an NG-RAN 799 and a 5GC 798. NG-RAN 799 can include gNBs 710 (e.g, 710a, b) and ng-eNBs 720 (e.g, 720a, b) that are interconnected with each other via respective Xn interfaces. The gNBs and ng-eNBs are also connected via the NG interfaces to 5GC 798, more specifically to the AMF (Access and Mobility Management Function) 730 (e.g, AMFs 730a, b) via respective NG-C interfaces and to the UPF (User Plane Function) 740 (e.g., UPFs 740a, b) via respective NG-U interfaces. Moreover, the AMFs 730a, b can communicate with one or more session management functions (SMFs, e.g., SMFs 750a, b) and network exposure functions (NEFs, e.g., NEFs 760a, b).
Each of the gNBs 710 can be similar to those shown in Figure 5, while each of the ng- eNBs can be similar to the eNBs shown in Figure 1 except that they connect to 5GC 798 via an NG interface rather than to EPC via an SI interface. Each of the gNBs and ng-eNBs can serve a geographic coverage area including one more cells, including cells 711a-b and 721a-b shown as exemplary in Figure 7. The gNBs and ng-eNBs can also use various directional beams to provide coverage in the respective cells. Depending on the particular cell in which it is located, a UE 705 can communicate with the gNB or ng-eNB serving that particular cell via the NR or LTE radio interface, respectively. In addition, UE 705 can be in MR-DC connectivity with a first cell served by an ng-eNB and a second cell served by a gNB, such as cells 720a and 710a shown in Figure 7.
Figure 8 is a block diagram showing a high-level comparison of the EN-DC, NE-DC, and NGEN-DC options briefly mentioned above. In EN-DC (A), the NR en-gNB (SN) is operating in NSA mode and has no direct control-plane (CP) interface with the EPC. Rather, the en-gNB’s CP connection to the EPC is indirect via the X2 interface to the eNB (MN), which has a CP connection with the EPC via Sl-C interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface). Both the eNB and the en-gNB have UP connections with the EPC via Sl-U interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface).
In NE-DC (B), the LTE ng-eNB (SN) has no direct control-plane (CP) interface with the 5GC. Rather, the ng-eNB’s CP connection to the 5GC is indirect via the Xn interface to the gNB (MN), which has a CP connection with the 5GC via the NG-C interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface). Both the gNB and the ng-eNB have UP connections with the 5GC via NG-U interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface).
In NGEN-DC (C), the NR gNB (SN) has no direct control-plane (CP) interface with the 5GC. Rather, the gNB’s CP connection to the 5GC is indirect via the Xn interface to the ng-eNB (MN), which has a CP connection with the 5GC via NG-C interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface). Both the gNB and the ng-eNB have UP connections with the 5GC via NG-U interface and with the UE (e.g., via Uu interface).
The RRC layer controls other mobility procedures related to DC, including SN Modification, SN Addition, SN Release, and SN Change. For example, the MN or SN can initiate an SN Modification procedure to perform configuration changes of the SCG within the SN (“intra- SN”), e.g., modification/release of UP resource configuration and PSCell changes. For PSCell changes, once a better cell in the same frequency as the UE’s current PSCell triggers an event, a UE measurement report and preparation of the target SN is needed before the RRCMeasurement configuration to execute addition/modification can be sent to the UE.
Figures 9-12 illustrate various procedures related to multi-connectivity for a UE. These procedures include various messages exchanged between UE, MN, SN, and other network nodes. Although the following description uses specific names for these messages, these names are intended to be exemplary rather than definitive.
An SN Addition procedure is initiated by the MN and is used to establish a UE context at the SN in order to provide radio resources from the SN to the UE. For bearers requiring SCG radio resources, this procedure is used to add at least the initial SCG serving cell of the SCG. This procedure can also be used to configure an SN terminated MCG bearer (where no SCG configuration is needed). Figure 9 illustrates an exemplary SN Addition procedure for MR-DC cases utilizing a 5GC. As shown in Figure 9, the procedure involves a UE (910), a MN (920), an SN (930), a user plane function (UPF, 940), and an access and mobility management function (AMF, 950). The UPF and AMF are functions in the 5GC.
The SN Addition procedure shown in Figure 9 is initiated by the MN and is used to establish a UE context at the SN to facilitate the SN providing radio resources to the UE. For bearers requiring SCG radio resources, this procedure can be used to add at least the initial SCG serving cell of the SCG. This procedure can also be used to configure an SN-terminated MCG bearer (where no SCG configuration is needed). The operations shown in Figure 9 are labelled numerically, but this numbering is used to facilitate the following description rather than to imply or require a particular order unless expressly stated otherwise. Dashed lines indicate optional operations that may depend on one or more conditions.
In operation 1, the MN sends an SN Addition Request message to request the target SN to allocate radio resources for one or more specific PDU Sessions/QoS Flows, indicating QoS Flows characteristics (QoS Flow Level QoS parameters, PDU session level transport network layer (TNL) address information, and PDU session level Network Slice info). For example, the TNL address information can include a GPRS Tunneling Protocol (GTP) Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (TEID) and a TNL Internet Protocol (IP) address, such as defined in 3GPP TS 38.423 (vl6.1.0). This TNL address information generally identifies a “tunnel.” Accordingly, in the following description, the terms “tunnel information,” “tunnel identifier(s),” and “TNL address information” are used interchangeably.
In addition, for bearers requiring SCG radio resources, MN indicates the requested SCG configuration information, including the entire UE capabilities and the UE capability coordination result. In this case, the MN also provides the latest measurement results for the SN to use when choosing and configuring the SCG cell(s). The MN can also request the SN to allocate radio resources for split SRB operation. The MN can also provide the needed security information to the SN (e.g., even if no SN-terminated bearers are setup) to enable SRB3 to be setup based on SN decision. For bearer options that require Xn-U resources between the MN and the SN, MN can also provide Xn-U TNL address information, e.g., Xn-U DL TNL address information for SN- terminated bearers and Xn-U UL TNL address information for MN terminated bearers. The SN may reject the request.
In operation 2, if the RRM entity in the SN is able to admit the resource request, it allocates respective radio resources and, dependent on the bearer type options, respective transport network resources. For bearers requiring SCG radio resources the SN triggers UE Random Access so that synchronization of the SN radio resource configuration can be performed. The SN decides the PScell and other SCG SCells and provides the new SCG radio resource configuration to the MN in a SN RRC configuration message contained in the SN Addition Request Acknowledge message. In case of bearer options that require Xn-U resources between the MN and the SN, the SN provides Xn-U TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, Xn-U UL TNL address information for SN-terminated bearers, Xn-U DL TNL address information for MN terminated bearers. For SN-terminated bearers, the SN provides the NG-U DL TNL address information for the respective PDU Session and security algorithm. If SCG radio resources have been requested, the SCG radio resource configuration is provided.
In operation 3, the MN sends an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to the UE including the SN RRC configuration message, preferably without modifying it. In operation 4, the UE applies the new configuration and replies to MN with an RRCConnectionReconfiguration complete message, including a SN RRC response message for SN, if needed. In case the UE is unable to comply with (part of) the configuration included in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message, it performs the reconfiguration failure procedure. In operation 5, the MN informs the SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully via SN Reconfiguration Complete message, including the encoded SN RRC response message, if received from the UE.
In operation 6, if configured with bearers requiring SCG radio resources, the UE performs random access (RA) towards the PSCell configured by the SN. The order the UE sends the MN RRC reconfiguration complete message and performs RA towards the SCG is not defined. A successful RA towards the SCG is not required for a successful completion of the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. In operation 7, in case of SN-terminated bearers using RLC AM, the MN sends SN Status Transfer to the SN.
In operation 8, in case of SN-terminated bearers using RLC AM, and dependent on the bearer characteristics of the respective QoS Flows, the MN may take actions to minimize service interruption due to activation of MR-DC (Data forwarding). In operations 9-12, for SN- terminated bearers, the update of the UP path towards the 5GC is performed via PDU session Path Update procedure.
In the SN Addition Request message (operation 1), the MN provides the list of the UE’s QoS flows/bearers that it wants to be handled by the SN (e.g, either as SN-terminated flows or MN-terminated bearers) in the PDU session resources to be added List IE (Information element), along with the PDU Session Resource Setup Info SN terminated and PDU Session Resource Setup Info MN terminated IEs that are part of it. Exemplary contents of these IEs are shown respectively in Tables 1-3 below. Table 1. PDU session resources to be added list.
Figure imgf000023_0001
Table 2. PDU Session Resource Setup Info - SN terminated
Figure imgf000023_0002
Table 3. PDU Session Resource Setup Info - MN terminated
Figure imgf000023_0003
In the PDU Session Resource Setup Info SN terminated IE (Table 2), the MN provides a list of the QoS flows that it wants the SN to setup (i.e., SN-terminated) and also provides an “Offered GBR QoS Flow information which is an indication to the SN that it can add this flow as part of a split bearer and how many resources the MN is willing to provide for this flow (whereas it is up to the SN whether or not to use the indicated resources). The UL NG-U UP TNL Information at UP FIE is sent also to the SN to provide the tunnel information for sending the UL data to the core network.
Note that the information in the PDU Session Resource Setup Info SN terminated IE (Table 2) is communicated at QoS flow level. For example, the MN provides a list of QoS flows to the SN, which can decide how many radio resources (e.g., DRBs) to establish to serve these QoS flows. The MN doesn’t know in advance how many bearers the SN will group the QoS flow into. For example, there can be 10 QoS flows in the list, and the SN can decide to have just two bearers, each aggregating 5 QoS flows. Consequently, the tunnel information is not provided in the PDU Session Resource Setup Info SN terminated IE, since when sending the SN Addition Request, the MN does not know how many DRBs the SN will establish and therefore it does not know how many tunnels are required.
In the PDU Session Resource Setup Info MN terminated IE (Table 3), the MN can provide a list of the bearers that it wants SN to setup, but only for MN terminated bearers (i.e., MCG split bearer). The MN can also provide the MN UL PDCP UP TNL Information for each bearer, which is the tunnel information to be used by the SN to forward UL data of MCG split bearers towards the MN. In contrast to the SN-terminated setup, the information in the PDU Session Resource Setup Info MN terminated IE is at the bearer level. This is because, in this case, the MN decides how many DRBs to establish for serving the QoS flows. Therefore, it can directly provide the uplink tunnel information in the SN Addition Request message that can be used to establish the required tunnels.
In the SN-Addition Request Acknowledge message (operation 2), the SN can provide the list of the QoS flows/bearers that it has admitted (either as SCG bearers, SCG split bearers or MCG split bearers) in the PDU session resources admitted to be added List IE (shown below in Table 4), along with the PDU Session Resource Setup Response Info SN terminated and PDU Session Resource Setup Response Info MN terminated IES that are part of it (shown respectively in Tables 5-6 below).
In the PDU Session Resource Setup Response Info SN terminated IE, the SN provides a list of the QoS flows that has admitted (grouped in the bearers that it has associated them with). If the SN has used the resources, if any, indicated by the MN (as provided in the Offered GBR QoS Flow information as discussed above), the SN indicates the amount of resources that the MN should provide in MCG requested GBR QoS Flow Information. This amount should be less than or equal to the Offered GBR QoS Flow information). The NG-U DL UP TNL Information at NG- RAN IE provides the tunnel information for sending the DL data from the core network. This information can be further forwarded from the MN to the CN later, so that both the tunnel end points are properly set for that PDU session in both the UL and DL directions. In the PDU Session Resource Setup Info MN terminated IE, the SN provides a list of the bearers that it has admitted (i.e., MCG split bearers) along with the S-Node DL SCO UP TNL Information, which is the tunnel information that the MN has to use to send data of MCG split bearers in the DL. Table 4. PDU session resources Admitted to be added list.
Figure imgf000025_0001
Table 5: PDU Session Resource Setup Response Info - SN terminated
Figure imgf000025_0002
Table 6: PDU Session Resource Setup Response Info - MN terminated
Figure imgf000025_0003
An SN Release procedure may be initiated either by the MN or by the SN and is used to initiate the release of the UE context and relevant resources at the SN. The recipient node of this request can reject it, e.g., if a SN change procedure is triggered by the SN. Figure 10 illustrates an exemplary MN-initiated SN Release procedure for MR-DC cases utilizing a 5GC. As shown in Figure 10, the procedure involves a UE (910), a MN (920), an SN (930), a user plane function (UPF, 940), and an access and mobility management function (AMF, 950). Each of these entities can correspond to an identically numbered entity in Figure 9. The operations shown in Figure 10 are labelled numerically, but this numbering is used to facilitate the following description rather than to imply or require a particular order unless expressly stated otherwise. Dashed lines indicate optional operations that may depend on one or more conditions.
In operation 1, the MN initiates the procedure by sending the SN Release Request message to the SN. If data forwarding is requested, the MN provides data forwarding addresses to the SN. In operation 2, the SN confirms SN Release by sending the SN Release Request Acknowledge message. Alternately, the SN may reject SN Release, e.g., if the SN change procedure is triggered by the SN. In operation 3, if needed, the MN indicates in an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message towards the UE that the UE shall release the entire SCG configuration. In case the UE is unable to comply with (part of) the configuration included in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message, it performs the reconfiguration failure procedure. Otherwise, in operation 4, the UE responds with an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message.
In operation 5, if the released bearers use RLC AM, the SN sends an SN Status Transfer to the MN. In operation 6, the SN forwards data received from the UPF to the MN. In operation 7, if applicable, a PDU Session Path Update procedure is performed among the MN, SN, UPF, and AMF. In operation 8, the MN sends a UE context release message to the SN. Upon reception of this message, the SN can release radio- and CP-related resource associated with the UE context. Any ongoing data forwarding may continue, as needed.
An SN Change procedure can be used to transfer a UE context from the source SN to a target SN and to change the SCG configuration in UE from the source SN to the target SN. The SN Change procedure can be MN-initiated or SN-initiated, but either case involves signaling over MCG SRB towards the UE. Figure 11 illustrates an exemplary MN-initiated SN Change procedure for MR-DC scenarios utilizing a 5GC network. As shown in Figure 11, the procedure involves a UE (1110), aMN (1120), a source SN (S-SN, 1130), a target SN (T-SN, 1135), a UPF (1140), and an AMF (1150). The operations shown in Figure 11 are labelled numerically, but this numbering is used to facilitate the following description rather than to imply or require a particular order unless expressly stated otherwise. Dashed lines indicate optional operations that may depend on one or more conditions.
In operations 1, the MN initiates the SN change by invoking the SN Addition procedure, specifically by sending an SN Addition Request message requesting the target SN to allocate resources for the UE. The MN may include measurement results related to the target SN. If data forwarding is needed, the target SN provides data forwarding addresses to the MN in the acknowledgement (operation 2). The target SN can also include an indication of the full or delta RRC configuration.
In operation 3a, if the allocation of target SN resources was successful, the MN initiates the release of the source SN resources by sending an SN Release Request message, to the S-SN, that includes a Cause indicating SCG mobility. If data forwarding is needed, the MN provides data forwarding addresses to the source SN. If direct data forwarding is used for SN terminated bearers, the MN provides data forwarding addresses as received from the target SN to source SN. Reception of the SN Release Request message triggers the source SN to stop providing user data to the UE and, if applicable, to start data forwarding. In operation 3b, the source SN responds to the MN with an SN Release Request Acknowledge message.
Next, the MN triggers the UE to apply the new configuration. In operation 4, the MN indicates the new configuration to the UE in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including the target SN’s RRC configuration message. The UE applies the new configuration and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message (operation 5) that includes the encoded SN RRC response message for the target SN, if needed. Alternately, if the UE is unable to comply with (part of) the configuration included in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message, it performs the reconfiguration failure procedure.
In operation 6, if the RRC connection reconfiguration procedure was successful, the MN informs the target SN via SN Reconfiguration Complete message that includes the encoded RRC response message for the target SN, if received from the UE in operation 5. In operation 7, if the UE is configured with bearers requiring SCG radio resources, the UE performs a random access procedure to synchronize with the target SN. In operations 8a-b, for SN terminated bearers using RLC acknowledge mode (AM), the source SN sends the SN Status Transfer message to the MN, which the MN forwards to the target SN.
In operation 9, if applicable, forwarding of UP data from source SN to target SN occurs via the MN. It may be initiated as early as operation 3a when the source SN receives the SN Release Request message from the MN. In operation 10, if one of the PDU session/QoS Flow was terminated at the source SN, a PDU Session Path Update procedure is performed among the MN, T-SN, UPF, and AMF. In operation 11, the MN sends a UE Context Release message to the SN. Upon reception of this message, the SN can release radio- and CP-related resource associated with the UE context. Any ongoing data forwarding may continue, as needed.
Figure 12 illustrates an exemplary SN-initiated SN Change procedure for MR-DC scenarios utilizing a 5GC network. This procedure involves the same entities as shown in Figure 11. The operations shown in Figure 12 are labelled numerically, but this numbering is used to facilitate the following description rather than to imply or require a particular order unless expressly stated otherwise. Dashed lines indicate optional operations that may depend on one or more conditions. In operation 1, the source SN initiates the SN change procedure by sending the SN Change
Required message to the MN. This message includes a candidate target SN ID and may also include an SCG configuration ( e.g ., to support delta configuration) and measurement results related to the target SN. In operations 2, the MN sends an SN Addition Request message requesting the target SN to allocate resources for the UE. The MN may include measurement results related to the target SN, e.g., as received from the source SN. If data forwarding is needed, the target SN provides data forwarding addresses to the MN in the acknowledgement (operation 3). The target SN can also include an indication of the full or delta RRC configuration.
Next, the MN triggers the UE to apply the new configuration. In operation 4, the MN indicates the new configuration to the UE in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including the target SN’s RRC configuration message. The UE applies the new configuration and sends an RRCConnectionReconflgurationComplete message (operation 5) that includes the encoded SN RRC response message for the target SN, if needed. Alternately, if the UE is unable to comply with (part ol) the configuration included in the MN RRC reconfiguration message, it performs the reconfiguration failure procedure. In operation 6, if the allocation of target SN resources was successful, the MN confirms the change to the source SN in an SN Change Confirm message. If data forwarding is needed, the MN provides data forwarding addresses to the source SN. If direct data forwarding is used for SN terminated bearers, the MN provides data forwarding addresses as received from the target SN. Reception of the SN Change Confirm message triggers the source SN to stop providing user data to the UE and, if applicable, to start data forwarding. Operations 7-12 in Figure 12 are substantially similar to operations 6-11 in Figure 11.
Similar procedures to those shown in Figures 9-12 can be used for MR-DC operation with an EPC, such as in EN-DC. Such procedures can involve an S-GW and an MME rather than a UPF and an AMF, as illustrated in Figures 9-12. Messages used for MR-DC operation with EPC can be the same as those used in Figure 9-12 or can differ in name and/or content.
As briefly mentioned above, Quality of Experience (QoE) measurements have been specified for UEs operating in LTE networks and in earlier-generation UMTS networks. Measurements in both networks operate according to the same high-level principles. Their purpose is to measure the experience of end users when using certain applications over a network. For example, QoE measurements for streaming services and for MTSI (Mobility Telephony Service for IMS) are supported in LTE.
QoE measurements may be initiated towards the RAN from an O&M node generically for a group of UEs (e.g., all UEs meeting one or more criteria), or they may also be initiated from the CN to the RAN for a specific UE. The configuration of the measurement includes the measurement details, which is encapsulated in a container that is transparent to RAN.
A "TRACE START" S1AP message is used by the LTE EPC for initiating QoE measurements by a specific UE. This message carries details about the measurement configuration the application should collect in the “Container for application layer measurement configuration” IE, which transparent to the RAN. This message also includes details needed to reach the TCE to which the measurements should be sent.
Figures 13A-D show various procedures between a UTRAN and a UE for QoE measurements in a legacy UMTS network. As shown in Figure 13 A, the UTRAN can send a UE Capability Enquiry message to request the UE to report its application layer measurement capabilities. As shown in Figure 13B, the UE can provide its application layer measurement capabilities to the UTRAN via a UE Capability Information message, particularly in a “Measurement Capability” IE that includes information related to UE capability to perform the QoE measurement collection for streaming services and/or MTSI services. Table 7 below shows exemplary contents of this IE: Table 7.
Figure imgf000029_0001
The UTRAN can respond with a UE Capability Information Confirm message. Figure 13C shows that the UTRAN can send a Measurement Control message containing “Application layer measurement configuration” IE in order to configure QoE measurement in the UE. Table 8 below shows exemplary contents of this IE: Table 8.
Figure imgf000030_0001
Figure 13D shows that the UE can send QoE measurement results via UTRAN to the TCE using a Measurement Report message that includes an “Application layer measurement reporting” IE. Table 9 below shows exemplary contents of this IE:
Table 9.
Figure imgf000030_0002
Figures 14A-C illustrate a procedure between an E-UTRAN and a UE for configuring QoE measurements in an LTE network. Figure 14A shows an exemplary UE capability transfer procedure used to transfer UE radio access capability information from the UE to E-UTRAN. Initially, the E-UTRAN can send a UECapabilityEnquiry message, similar to the arrangement shown in Figure 13 A. The UE can respond with a UECapability Information message that includes a “UE-EUTRA-Capability” IE.
This IE may further include a UE-EUTRA-Capability-vl530 IE, which can be used to indicate whether the UE supports QoE Measurement Collection for streaming services and/or MTSI services. In particular, the UE-EUTRA-Capability-vl530 IE can include a “measParameters-vl530” IE containing the information about the UE’s measurement support. In some cases, the “UE-EUTRA-Capability” IE can also include a “UE-EUTRA-Capability- vl6xy-IE”, which can include a “qoe-Extensions-rl6” field. Figure 14B shows an exemplary ASN.l data structure for these various IEs, with the various fields defined in Table 10 below. Table 10.
Figure imgf000031_0001
Figure 14C shows an exemplary ASN.l data structure for the qoe-Reference parameter mentioned in Table 10 above. Figures 15A-C illustrate various aspects of QoE measurement collection for a UE in an
LTE network. In particular, Figure 15A shows an exemplary signal flow diagram of a QoE measurement collection process for LTE. To initiate QoE measurements, the serving eNB sends to a UE in RRC CONNECTED state an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message that includes a QoE configuration file, e.g., a measConfigAppLayer IE within an OtherConfig IE. As discussed above, the QoE configuration file is an application-layer measurement configuration received by the eNB (e.g., from EPC) encapsulated in a transparent container, which is forwarded to UE in the RRC message. The UE responds with an RRCConnectionReconflgurationComplete message. Subsequently, the UE performs the configured QoE measurements and sends a MeasReportAppLayer RRC message to the eNB, including a QoE measurement result file. Although not shown, the eNB can forward this result file transparently (e.g., to EPC).
Figure 15B shows an exemplary ASN.l data structure for a measConfigAppLayer IE, including a measConfigAppLayerToAddModList-x\6 and a measConfigAppLayerToRelease- List- rl6. The former may be used to add or modify multiple QoE measurement configurations (up to maxQoE-Measurement-r 16), and the latter may be used to remove multiple QoE measurement configuration (up to maxQoE-Measurement-r 16) . In the serviceType field, a value of “qoe” indicates Quality of Experience Measurement Collection for streaming services and a value of “qoemtsi” indicates Enhanced Quality of Experience Measurement Collection for MTSI. This field also includes various spare values. The following procedural statements exemplify desired UE behavior upon reception of the a measConfigAppLayer IE in the OtherConfig IE within the RRCReconfiguration:
1> if the received OtherConfig includes the measConfigAppLayerToAddModList :
2> for each serviceType and qoe-Reference included in the measConfigAppLayerToAddModList
2> forward measConfigAppLayerContainer , qoe-Reference and serviceType to upper layers considering the serviceType,
2> consider itself to be configured to send application layer measurement report in accordance with 5.6.19;
2> forward withinArea to upper layers if received;
2> forward temporaryStopQoE to upper layers if received;
2> forward restartQoE to upper layers if received;
1> if the received OtherConfig includes the measConfigAppLayer ToReleaseList :
2> for each serviceType and qoe-Reference included in the measConfigAppLayerToReleaseList:
2> inform upper layers to clear the associated stored application layer measurement configuration;
2> discard received associated application layer measurement report information from upper layers;
2> consider itself not to be configured to send the associated application layer measurement report for that serviceType and qoe-Reference.
Figure 15C shows an exemplary ASN.l data structure for a meas Report AppLayer IE, by which a UE can send to the E-UTRAN (e.g., via SRB4) the QoE measurement results of an application (or service). The service for which the report is being sent is indicated in the “serviceType” IE. The measReportAppLayer IE can also include a qoe-reference IE, as discussed above, containing the PLMN identity and an ID associated with the QoE measurement collection.
A UE capable of application layer measurement reporting in RRC CONNECTED may initiate the procedure when configured with application layer measurement, i.e., when measConfigAppLayer has been configured by E-UTRAN. Upon initiating the procedure, the UE shall:
1> if configured with application layer measurement, and SRB4 is configured, and the UE has received application layer measurement report information from upper layers:
2> set the measReportAppLayerContainer in the MeasReportAppLayer message to the value of the application layer measurement report information; 2> set the serviceType in the MeasReportAppLayer message to the type of the application layer measurement report information;
2> set the qoe-Reference in the MeasReportAppLayer message to the value received from upper layer;
2> set the recordingSessionlndication in the MeasReportAppLayer message to the value received from upper layer;
2> submit MeasReportAppLayer message to lower layers for transmission via SRB4.
Figure 16 shows a more detailed signal flow of activation of QoE measurement collection and reporting of collected information without UE mobility in an LTE network. This signal flow is between a measurement collection entity (MCE, 1650), a network manager (NM, 1640), a domain manager (DM/EM, 1630), one or more eNBs (1620) in E-UTRAN, and the UE (1610) - particularly access stratum (or access, for short) and application parts of the UE. The following description omits these reference numbers for brevity. Although the operations shown in Figure 16 are given numerical labels, these labels are intended to facilitate the following description rather than to require and/or imply a particular order of the operations.
In operation 1, the NM sends an Activate Measurement Job message to the DM, which forwards to the message to the eNB in operation 2. The message includes a service type (e.g., streaming), an area scope, a measurement configuration file for the QoE measurements to be performed, and a QoE reference identifier. In operation 3, the eNB identifies served cells matching the area scope, as well as UEs in these served cells that match other parameters in the message (e.g., service type). The eNB can base this determination on UE capability information sent from the UE to the eNB (not shown).
In operation 4, after identifying the UE matching the received criteria, the eNB sends an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to the AS (e.g., RRC layer) of the UE. The eNB includes the service type, the area scope (e.g., one or more cells, tracking areas, etc.), the measurement configuration file, and the QoE reference .
In operation 5, the UE AS forwards this information to the UE application part using an AT command +CAPPLEVMC, as specified in 3GPP TS 27.007. In general, AT commands can be used to transfer information between different layers in the UE, such as between application and AS. In particular, AT command +CAPPLEVMC is of the following form when used for QoE measurement configuration:
+CAPPLEVMC : <app-meas_service_type>,<start-stop_reporting>[,<app- meas_config_file_length>,<app-meas_config-file>], where the various fields are defined below: <n>: integer type. Disable and enable presentation of the unsolicited result code
+CAPPLEVMC to the TE.
0 Disable presentation of the unsolicited result code
1 Enable presentation of the unsolicited result code <app-meas_service_type>: integer type. Contains the indication of what application that is target for the application level measurement configuration.
1 QoE measurement collection for streaming services
2 QoE measurement collection for MTSI services <start-stop_reporting>: integer type. Indicates the start and stop of the application level measurement reporting for the application indicated by the <app-meas_service_type>.
0 start the application level measurement reporting
1 stop the application level measurement reporting
<app-meas_config_file_length>: integer type. Indicates the number of octets of the <app- meas_config-file> parameter.
<app-meas_config-file>: string of octets. Contains the application level measurement configuration file for the application indicated by the <app-meas_service_type>. The parameter shall not be subject to conventional character conversion as per +CSCS.
Returning to the discussion of Figure 16, in operation 6, the UE starts an application associated with the service type and initiates measurement collection according to the received configuration and area. The UE assigns this measurement collection a recording session ID and reports this ID (in operation 7) to the UE AS using the same AT command. In operation 8, the UE AS sends this ID to the eNB in a MeasReportAppLayer RRC message, and the eNB notifies the NM of the initiation of the measurement collection in operation 9.
The UE application layer completes the QoE measurement collection according to the received configuration (operation 10) and reports the results to the UE AS via AT command +CAPPLEVMR (operation 11) along with the associated QoE reference ID received earlier. The report can be a transparent container, as discussed earlier. AT command +CAPPLEVMC is of the following form when used for QoE measurement reporting:
+CAPPLEVMC=<app-meas_service_type>,<app-meas_report_length>,<app-meas_report> where the various fields are defined below:
<app_meas_service_type>: integer type. Contains the indication of what application that is providing the application level measurement report.
1 QoE measurement collection for streaming services
2 QoE measurement collection for MTSI services <app-meas_report_length>: integer type. Indicates the number of octets of the <app- meas_report> parameter.
<app-meas_report>: string of octets. Contains the application level measurement configuration file for the application indicated by the <app-meas_service_type>. The parameter shall not be subject to conventional character conversion as per +CSCS.
In operation 12, the UE AS sends the report and the QoE reference ID to the eNB in a MeasReportAppLayer RRC message. The eNB subsequently forwards the report to the MCE (operation 13). In some cases, the MCE may forward the QoE measurement report another entity in the network for analysis and further action (e.g., in the OAM system).
A new study item for “Study on NR QoE management and optimizations for diverse services” has been approved for NR Rel-16. The purpose is to study solutions for QoE measurements in NR, not only for streaming services as in LTE but also for other services such as augmented or virtual reality (AR/VR), URLLC, etc. Based on requirements of the various services, the NR study will also include more adaptive QoE management schemes that enable intelligent network optimization to satisfy user experience for diverse services.
Similar to LTE, UE QoE measurements made in NG-RAN may be initiated by a management function (e.g., OAM) in a generic way for a group of UEs, or they may be initiated by the core network (e.g., 5GC) towards a specific UE based on signaling with the NG-RAN. As mentioned above, the configuration of the measurement includes the measurement details, which is encapsulated in a container that is transparent to the NG-RAN.
In general, the RAN (e.g., E-UTRAN or NG-RAN) is not aware of an ongoing streaming session for a UE and nor of when QoE measurements are being performed by the UE. Even so, it is important for the client or management function analyzing the measurements that the entire streaming session is measured. It is beneficial, then, that the UE maintains QoE measurements for the entire session, even during handover situation. It has been concluded during a 3GPP study that fragmented QoE reports are of little use. However, it is an implementation decision when RAN stops the QoE measurements. For example, it could be done when the UE has moved outside the measured area, e.g., due to a handover.
Even so, there are various problems, issues, and/or difficulties with current QoE measurement procedures such that they are unable to meet the requirements for the variety of services that will be deployed in 5G networks that may include both E-UTRAN and NG-RAN. For example, currently a UE delivers a QoE measurement report via RRC, which is terminated at the gNB-CU in case of the split architecture. In some cases, however, a gNB-DU needs to make a prompt reaction to a QoE measurement report since the gNB-DU handles the radio resource management unit (e.g., scheduler) in the gNB. For example, in response to a UE buffer level measurement, a gNB-CU may need to change scheduling priorities. In other cases, QoE reporting may be useful for classification of UEs (e.g., mapping between QoE measurement and UE classes) and provisioning of privileged resources to some class of UEs, as desired and/or required. Since the radio resources are owned by the gNB-DU in split architecture, it may be necessary to deliver the QoE measurement report to the gNB-DU to facilitate QoE-aware resource allocation in the NG-RAN.
However, it is unclear how QoE measurement reports can be made available at the gNB- DU. For example, NR QoE management for NR (and, implicitly, for the split architecture) currently has not been specified. In addition, a gNB-DU is oblivious to the RRC messages that carry the QoE measurement report. In other words, such RRC messages are transparent to the gNB-DU. In addition, there is lack of support to make QoE measurement report available at RAN node, given that the QoE management for LTE has not been specified for split eNB architecture.
Accordingly, embodiments of the present disclosure provide network signaling techniques that make a QoE measurement report available at the gNB-DU (or ng-eNB-DU) serving a cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE. These embodiments can provide various benefits, advantages, and/or solutions to problems described herein. For example, in the split gNB/ng-eNB architecture, the delivery of a QoE measurement report from CU to the DU can enable the DU to act promptly in managing resources owned/controlled by the DU.
Embodiments can also improve responsive in DC architectures. For EN-DC, a QoE measurement report can be sent from MeNB to gNB-CU, which can then deliver it to the gNB- DU. For NR-DC, a QoE measurement report can be sent from MgNB to SgNB-CU (or vice versa), which can then deliver it to the SgNB-DU. More generally, embodiments facilitate delivery of a QoE measurement report between two NG-RAN nodes, e.g., over Xn or NG interface.
Based on timely receipt of QoE measurement reports, a RAN node can perform a QoE- aware resource allocation for various types of services. Such QoE measurements can be combined with the radio link measurements executed in the RAN to facilitate a QoE-aware radio resource scheduler in the RAN node (e.g., gNB-DU). In this manner, RAN nodes can provide more intelligent and/or adaptive QoS/QoE control and resource allocation mechanisms that take advantage of real-time QoE measurements reported by UEs, as well as UE characteristics available from respective UE contexts. The following groups of terms and/or abbreviations are used synonymously in the description of various embodiments:
• “QoE measurement report”, “QMR”, “QoE report”, “measurement report”; and “report”;
• “QoE measurement configuration” and “QoE measurement”;
• “service” and “application”;
• “leg” and “path”;
• “Measurement collection entity”, “MCE”, “trace collection entity”, and “TCE”; and
• “send”, “forward”, and “deliver”.
In addition, the term “NG-RAN node” is used to refer to either a gNB or an ng-eNB, such as discussed above. Likewise, an “NG-RAN node CU” refers to a gNB-CU or an ng-eNB- CU, while “NG-RAN node DU” refers to a gNB-DU or an ng-eNB-DU.
Note that a first radio network node (RNN) forwarding a received QoE measurement report to a second RNN does not preclude the first RNN from also extracting information from the QoE measurement report to use for operations of the first RNN and/or for serving UEs.
In some embodiments, at a high level, an NG-RAN node CU signals the QoE measurement report to a NG-RAN node DU over an FI interface (e.g., Fl-AP). This NG-RAN node DU serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE. Figure 17 shows an exemplary signal flow diagram between an NG-RAN node CU (1710) and DU (1720) according to these embodiments.
Upon receiving the QoE measurement report (QMR), a gNB-CU may deliver the QMR to a gNB-DU over the FI interface in various ways, including the following:
• Inside an existing UE-associated (UA) F1AP message, e.g., UE CONTEXT MODIFICATION REQUEST. In this case, one or a list of several QMRs for one or several applications running at the same UE can be delivered.
• Inside an existing non-UE associated (NUA) F1AP message, e.g., CU-DU RADIO INFORMATION TRANSFER, GNB-DU RESOURCE COORDINATION REQUEST or GNB-CU CONFIGURATION UPDATE. In this case, one or a list of several QMRs (for several applications) for one or more UEs can be delivered.
• Inside a newly defined UA or NUA FI AP message.
Similarly, upon receiving a QoE measurement report (QMR), an ng-eNB-CU may deliver the QMR to an ng-eNB-DU over the W1 interface in various ways, including the following:
• Inside a UE-associated (UA) W1AP message, e.g., UE CONTEXT MODIFICATION REQUEST. In this case, one or a list of several QMRs for one or several applications running at the same UE can be delivered. • Inside an existing non-UE associated (NUA) W1AP messages, e.g., “NG-ENB-DU RESOURCE COORDINATION REQUEST” or “NG-ENB-CU CONFIGURATION UPDATE”.
• Inside a new non-UE associated (NUA) W1AP messages, e.g., “NG-ENB-CU-DU RADIO INFORMATION TRANSFER”. In this case, one or a list of several QMRs (for several applications) for one or more UEs can be delivered.
• Inside a newly defined UA or NUA W1 AP message.
In some embodiments, a DU may request a QoE report for one or more specific UEs, e.g., based on corresponding one or more UE identities (UE IDs). Upon receiving the QoE report request from DU, the CU responds with the requested QoE measurement report for the specified UE(s).
Other embodiments can include inter-RAN node signaling of QoE measurement report over X2 or Xn interfaces. Figure 18 shows an exemplary signal flow diagram involving a CU (1810) of a first NG-RAN node and a CU (1830) and a DU (1820) of a second NG-RAN node according to these embodiments. Reference numbers will be omitted in the following discussion for brevity.
Upon receiving a QoE measurement report from a UE, the first NG-RAN node forwards the received QoE measurement report to a second NG-RAN node that serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE. In the example shown in Figure 18, the CU of the first NG-RAN node forwards the report over the Xn interface to a CU of the second NG-RAN node. Subsequently, the CU signals the QoE measurement report DU over an FI interface (e.g., Fl-AP) to the DU that serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE.
For example, the first NG-RAN node and second NG-RAN node shown in Figure 18 may have established a DC scenario for UE (e.g., LTE-DC, EN-DC, NE-DC, NR-DC, etc.). As such, one of the first and second NG-RAN nodes is the UE’s MN, the other is the UE’s SN, and the signaling can go in either direction depending on whether SN or MN received the QoE measurement report. More specifically, if the QoE measurements is performed with respect to a cell served by the SN but the corresponding QoE measurement report is received by the MN, the MN signals the QoE measurement report to the SN according to Figure 18. Likewise, if the QoE measurements is performed with respect to a cell served by the MN but the corresponding QoE measurement report is received by the SN, the SN signals the QoE measurement report to the MN according to Figure 18. Note that while Figure 18 show the split CU-DU architecture, the same principles can be applied for two NG-RAN nodes of a conventional, non-split architecture. According to some embodiments, the QMR can be delivered between the MN (NG-RAN node) and SN (NG-RAN node) via Xn interface in various ways, including the following:
• Inside an existing UE-associated (UA) XnAP message, e.g., TRACE START, S-NODE MODIFICATION REQUEST. In this case, one or a list of several QMRs for several applications running at the same UE or multiple different UEs (e.g., grouped per application) can be delivered.
• Inside an existing non-UE associated (NUA) XnAP message e.g., NG-RAN NODE CONFIGURATION UPDATE. In this case, one or a list of several QMRs (for one or several applications) for one or more UEs can be delivered.
• Inside a newly defined NUA or UA XnAP message.
According to other embodiments, the QMR can be delivered between the MN (e.g., MeNB) and SN (e.g., SgNB) via X2 interface in various ways, including the following:
• Inside an existing UE-associated (UA) X2AP message, e.g., Fl-C TRAFFIC TRANSFER, TRACE START. In this case, one or a list of several QMRs for several applications running at the same UE or different UEs can be delivered.
• Inside an existing or a newly defined non-UE associated (NUA) X2AP message, e.g., QoE REPORT, or SON REPORT.
• Inside a newly defined UE associated X2AP message, e.g., QoE REPORT, or SON REPORT
Other embodiments can include inter-system inter-RAN node signaling of QoE measurement report over NG or SI interfaces. Figures 19-20 show two exemplary signal flow diagrams according to these embodiments. In particular, Figure 19 shows an exemplary signal flow diagram involving a CU (1810) of a first NG-RAN node and a CU (1830) and a DU (1820) of a second NG-RAN node, with the two NG-RAN nodes being connected to a node or function in 5GC (1840), such as an AMF. Note that elements shown in Figure 19 can be the same as identically numbered elements in Figure 18. Reference numbers will be omitted in the following discussion for brevity.
Upon receiving a QoE measurement report from a UE, the first NG-RAN node forwards the received QoE measurement report to an AMF in the 5GC over an NG interface. The AMF then forwards the report to a second NG-RAN node that serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE. In the example shown in Figure 19, the report is forwarded over an NG interface to a CU of the second NG- RAN node. Subsequently, the CU signals the QoE measurement report DU over an FI interface (e.g., Fl-AP) to the DU that serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE. According to some embodiments, the QMR can be delivered between the NG-RAN nodes via an AMF over the NG interface inside an existing NGAP message, e.g., Uplink RAN Configuration Transfer, and or Downlink RAN Configuration Transfer. In this case, several QMRs (a list of QMRs) for several UEs or several applications running at the same UE can be delivered.
An AMF may receive QoE measurement report data from an NG-RAN node in an NGAP message as a transparent container to be forwarded to a destination NG-RAN node, e.g., the NG- RAN node controlling the cell in which the QoE measurement report data was collected. The received NGAP message can include an identifier of the destination NG-RAN node, the destination NG-RAN node’s IP address, or an identity of the cell. The AMF can identity the destination NG-RAN node based on any of these in the NGAP message.
If the destination NG-RAN node is not connected to the AMF, the AMF forwards the received QoE measurement report data (i.e., the transparent container) to one or more AMFs connected to the destination NG-RAN node. This forwarding is performed over the N14 interface, e.g., using a Configuration Transfer Tunnel message or a new N14 message. The receiving AMF(s) in turn forwards the QoE measurement report data (i.e., the transparent container) to the destination NG-RAN node in an NGAP message, e.g., Uplink RAN Configuration Transfer, Downlink RAN Configuration Transfer, or a new NGAP message.
In addition, Figure 20 shows an exemplary signal flow diagram based on the two RAN nodes being connected to an EPC. More specifically, Figure 20 involves a CU (2010) of a first RAN node and a CU (2030) and a DU (2020) of a second RAN node, with the two RAN nodes being connected to a node or function in EPC (2040), such as an MME. Reference numbers will be omitted in the following discussion for brevity. Note that while Figure 20 show the split CU- DU architecture, the same principles can be applied between two RAN nodes of a conventional, non-split architecture.
Upon receiving a QoE measurement report from a UE, the first RAN node forwards the received QoE measurement report to an MME in the EPC over an SI interface (e.g., Sl-AP). The MME then forwards the report to a second RAN node that serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE. In the example shown in Figure 20, the report is forwarded over an SI interface to a CU of the second RAN node. Subsequently, the CU signals the QoE measurement report DU over an FI interface (e.g., Fl-AP) to the DU that serves the cell in which the QoE measurement data (comprising the report) was collected by the reporting UE. According to some embodiments, the QMR can be delivered between the RAN nodes via an MME over the SI interface inside an a newly defined S1AP message, e.g., QoE REPORT or SON REPORT.
An MME may receive QoE measurement report data from a RAN node in an S1AP message as a transparent container to be forwarded to a destination RAN node, e.g. , the RAN node controlling the cell in which the QoE measurement report data was collected. The received SI AP message can include an identifier of the destination RAN node, the destination RAN node’s IP address, or an identity of the cell. The MME can identity the destination RAN node based on any of these in the S1AP message.
If the destination RAN node is not connected to the MME, the MME forwards the received QoE measurement report data (i.e., the transparent container) to an MME connected to the destination RAN node. The receiving MME in turn forwards the QoE measurement report data (i.e., the transparent container) to the destination RAN node in an SI AP message, discussed above.
In other embodiments, the QoE measurement report can be exchanged between RAN nodes connected to different CNs, e.g., first RAN node connected to EPC and second RAN node connected to 5GC. If there is no direct interface between the RAN nodes, the transfer of the QoE measurement reports may be performed based on forwarding between the two CNs. For example, forwarding of a transparent RAN container containing QoE measurement report data may be performed over the N26 interface from an AMF (in 5GC) to an MME (in EPC) or from an MME to an AMF.
Furthermore, in various embodiments, QoE measurement reports can be sent as a single measurement report or RAN nodes may collect multiple QoE measurement reports and send them as a group and/or list to the other RAN nodes according to the different embodiments described above.
In various embodiments, a UE may be configured to operate in multiple radio access technologies (RATs), such as NR and LTE. Accordingly, a UE that collects QoE measurements in a particular RAT (also referred to as “source RAT”) may have various options of when to report the collected QoE measurements, including the following:
• After handover from the source RAT to a target RAT, the UE may continue the QoE measurements and provide the report of the QoE measurement of the source RAT to the target RAT.
• After handover from the source RAT to the target RAT, the UE may stop the QoE measurements and provide the report of the QoE measurement of the source RAT to the target RAT. • After handover from the source RAT to the target RAT, the UE may stop the QoE measurements and keep the QoE measurement of the source RAT until it returns back to the source RAT again and report it to the source RAT.
• After handover from the source RAT to the target RAT, the UE may continue the QoE measurements but keep the QoE measurement of the source RAT until it returns to the source RAT and report it to the source RAT at that time.
• After addition of another connectivity leg (e.g., a secondary cell controlled by a secondary RAN node), wherein the data flow of the measured application is transferred to the new connectivity leg, and wherein the new connectivity leg may be of the same RAT as the connectivity leg where the QoE measurement started (e.g., NR DC) or a different RAT (e.g., EN-DC), the UE may continue the QoE measurements and send the report of the QoE measurements performed on both connectivity legs on the new connectivity leg.
• After addition of another connectivity leg (e.g., a secondary cell controlled by a secondary RAN node), wherein the data flow of the measured application is transferred to the new connectivity leg, and wherein the new connectivity leg may be of the same RAT as the connectivity leg where the QoE measurement started (e.g., NR DC) or a different RAT (e.g., EN-DC), the UE may continue the QoE measurements and send the report of the QoE measurements performed on both connectivity legs on the connectivity leg where the QoE measurements started.
• After addition of another connectivity leg (e.g., a secondary cell controlled by a secondary RAN node), wherein the data flow of the measured application is transferred to the new connectivity leg, and wherein the new connectivity leg may be of the same RAT as the connectivity leg where the QoE measurement started (e.g., NR DC) or a different RAT (e.g., EN-DC), the UE may continue the QoE measurements and divide the results of the QoE measurements into one part for the QoE measurements performed on the first connectivity leg (where the QoE measurement was started) and another part for the QoE measurements performed on the second connectivity leg and report each part separately on the connectivity leg on which the respective QoE measurements were performed.
• After addition of another connectivity leg (e.g., a secondary cell controlled by a secondary RAN node), wherein the data flow of the measured application is transferred to the new connectivity leg, and wherein the new connectivity leg may be of the same RAT as the connectivity leg where the QoE measurement started (e.g., NR DC) or a different RAT (e.g., EN-DC), the UE may stop the QoE measurements and send the report of the QoE measurements on the connectivity leg where the QoE measurements were performed. Optionally, the UE also restarts the QoE measurements on the new connectivity leg and when a report on these subsequent (restarted) QoE measurements have been compiled, the UE may send it on the connectivity leg where the QoE measurements were performed (i.e., the new connectivity leg in this case).
• After addition of another connectivity leg (e.g., a secondary cell controlled by a secondary RAN node), wherein the data flow of the measured application is transferred to the new connectivity leg, and wherein the new connectivity leg may be of the same RAT as the connectivity leg where the QoE measurement started (e.g., NR DC) or a different RAT (e.g., EN-DC), the UE may continue the QoE measurements and send the report of the QoE measurements performed on both connectivity legs duplicated on both connectivity legs.
• After addition of another connectivity leg (e.g., a secondary cell controlled by a secondary RAN node), wherein the data flow of the measured application subsequently is transmitted partly on the connectivity leg on which the QoE measurement started and partly on the new one, and wherein the new connectivity leg may be of the same RAT as the connectivity leg where the QoE measurement started (e.g., NR DC) or a different RAT (e.g., EN-DC), the UE may: o continue the QoE measurements on both legs, and divide the results of the QoE measurements into one part for the QoE measurements performed on the first connectivity leg (where the QoE measurement was started) and another part for the QoE measurements performed on the second connectivity leg and report each part separately on the connectivity leg on which the respective QoE measurements were performed; o continue the QoE measurements on both legs and send the resulting QoE measurement report on the connectivity leg on which the QoE measurements were started; o continue the QoE measurements on both legs and send the resulting QoE measurement report on the new connectivity leg; or o continue the QoE measurements on both legs and send the resulting QoE measurement report (duplicated) on both the connectivity leg on which the QoE measurements were started and on the new connectivity leg.
• After addition of another connectivity leg (e.g., a secondary cell controlled by a secondary RAN node), wherein the data flow of the measured application subsequently is duplicated and transmitted on both the connectivity leg on which the QoE measurement started and on the new connectivity leg (i.e., duplicating/bicasting the application data flow to achieve greater robustness through redundancy) and wherein the new connectivity leg may be of the same RAT as the connectivity leg where the QoE measurement started (e.g., NR DC) or a different RAT (e.g., EN-DC), the UE may: o continue the QoE measurements on both legs as a single QoE measurement session for both connectivity legs (e.g., for the merged data flow resulting from putting together the application data arriving at the different connectivity legs) and send the resulting QoE measurement report on the connectivity leg on which the QoE measurement was started; o continue the QoE measurements on both legs as a single QoE measurement session for both connectivity legs simultaneously (e.g., for the merged data flow resulting from putting together the application data arriving at the different connectivity legs) and send the resulting QoE measurement report on the new connectivity leg; o continue the QoE measurements on both legs as a single QoE measurement session for both connectivity legs (e.g., for the merged data flow resulting from putting together the application data arriving at the different connectivity legs) and send the resulting QoE measurement report (duplicated) both on the connectivity leg on which the QoE measurement was started and on the new connectivity leg; or o continue the QoE measurements separately on each connectivity leg and send one QoE report for each connectivity leg for the QoE measurements on each respective connectivity leg. That is, the UE may send a QoE report resulting from the QoE measurements on the connectivity leg on which the QoE measurements were started, and send the QoE report resulting from the QoE measurements on the new connectivity leg on the new connectivity leg.
Table 11 below shows exemplary contents of a CU-DU RADIO INFORMATION TRANSFER message, modified according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. For example, the message can be sent over an FI interface between a gNB-CU and a gNB-DU.
Table 11.
Figure imgf000044_0001
Figure imgf000045_0001
Table 12 below shows exemplary contents of a CU-DU RADIO INFORMATION TRANSFER message, according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. For example, the message can be sent over a W1 interface between an ng-eNB-CU and a ng-eNB-DU. Figure 21 illustrates an exemplary signaling flow according to these embodiments.
Table 12.
Figure imgf000045_0002
As mentioned above, a new message QoE REPORT can also be defined to send QoE measurement reports over an FI interface between a gNB-CU and a gNB-DU. Table 13 below shows exemplary contents of a QoE REPORT message according to these embodiments. A gNB CU can use UE-associated or non-UE-associated signaling depending on the existence of the UE context at the time of receiving the QoE report.
Table 13.
Figure imgf000045_0003
Figure imgf000046_0001
Alternatively, a QoE measurement report can be included in an Fl-C TRAFFC TRANSFER message, without intervention/modification by the gNB-CU, provided that the FI AP message for QoE measurement report is defined according to embodiments described above. Similarly, a new message QoE REPORT can also be defined to send QoE measurement reports over a W1 interface between an ng-eNB-CU and an ng-eNB-DU. Table 14 below shows exemplary contents of a QoE REPORT message according to these embodiments. An ng-eNB- CU can use UE-associated or non-UE-associated signaling depending on the existence of the UE context at the time of receiving the QoE report Table 14.
Figure imgf000046_0002
As mentioned above, both the UPLINK RAN CONFIGURATION TRANSFER and DOWNLINK RAN CONFIGURATION TRANSFER messages can be used to transfer QoE measurement report via AMF between NG-RAN nodes without Xn interface. Both of these messages include a SON Configuration Transfer information element (IE). Table 15 below shows exemplary contents of a SON Configuration Transfer IE modified according to various embodiments of the present disclosure.
Table 15.
Figure imgf000046_0003
Figure imgf000047_0001
In addition, eNB CONFIGURATION TRANSFER and MME CONFIGURATION TRANSFER messages can be used to transfer QoE measurement reports via MME between RAN nodes without direct X2 interface. Both of these messages include a SON Configuration Transfer IE. Table 16 below shows exemplary contents of a SON Configuration Transfer IE modified according to various embodiments of the present disclosure.
Table 16.
Figure imgf000047_0002
Upon receiving a QoE measurement report, a gNB-CU or ng-eNB-CU may extract content that can be used to trigger the modification of UP attributes, such as the modification of an established PDU Session (or setup of a new one) or modification of an established bearer (or setup of a new one). Modifications may include changing the QoS associated with a bearer or an application data flow, or changing the scheduling priority of a UE, a bearer, or a data flow. Other possible modifications include changed packet marking and release of a bearer or PDU session. Other possible modifications include temporarily disabling data rate throttling or temporarily ignoring subscription-associated data volume caps. Some of these UP -related modifications may involve signalling to the 5GC to facilitate enforcement by suitable entity, such as a gateway (e.g., a PDN Gateway, PGW) or a User Plane Function (UPF).
As an example, in the split UP/CP architecture, the QoE measurement report information extracted by a CU-CP may be used to trigger CU-UP to modify settings of an existing bearer or setup a new bearer for the same UE. This can be done by reusing existing El AP procedures, such as Bearer Context Modification or Bearer Context Setup messages. Likewise, QoE measurement information may be sent from CU-CP to 5GC which may decide to modify an existing PDU Session or setup/release a (redundant) PDU Session based on the QoE measurement report content that indicates QoE requirements are not fulfilled or are recovered. An exemplary NGAP message that can be used for this purpose is PDU SESSION RESOURCE NOTIFY, which includes a PDU Session Resource Modify Indication Transfer IE. Table 17 below shows exemplary contents of a PDU Session Resource Modify Indication Transfer IE modified according to various embodiments of the present disclosure to include QoE measurements information.
Table 17.
Figure imgf000048_0001
The embodiments described above can be further illustrated with reference to Figures 22- 23 and 33-34, which show exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) performed by a first RAN node (RNN), a second RNN, a core network (CN) node, and a UE, respectively. In other words, various features of operations described below correspond to various embodiments described above. The exemplary methods illustrated by Figures 22-23 and 33-34 can be used cooperatively to provide various benefits and/or advantages, including those described herein. Although Figures 22-23 and 33-34 show specific blocks in particular orders, the operations represented by the blocks can be performed in different orders than shown and can be combined and/or divided into blocks having different functionality than shown. Optional blocks or operations are indicated by dashed lines.
In particular, Figure 22 shows a flow diagram of an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for handling QoE measurements by UEs in a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure. The exemplary method can be performed by a first radio access network node (RNN, e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc., or component thereof) in a wireless network (e.g., E-UTRAN, NG-RAN).
The exemplary method can include operations of block 2210, where the first RNN can receive, from a UE via a first cell, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a second cell. The exemplary method can include operations of block 2220, where the first RNN can determine that the second cell is served by a second RNN. The exemplary method can include operations of block 2240, where the first RNN can, based on determining that the second cell is served by the second RNN, forward the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
In some embodiments, the first cell uses a first radio access technology (RAT) and one of the following applies: the second cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT, or the second cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE.
In some embodiments, the QoE measurement report also includes further application-layer QoE measurements associated with the first cell. In other embodiments, the application-layer QoE measurements are associated with the second cell and the first cell.
In some embodiments, the first RNN is a centralized unit (CU) of a base station, the second RNN is a distributed unit (DU) of the base station, and the QoE measurement report is forwarded (e.g., in block 2240) via an intra-base station interface between the CU and the DU. An example of these embodiments is illustrated by Figure 17. In some embodiments, the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface. In other embodiments, the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
In other embodiments, the first RNN is one of a master node (MN) or a secondary node (SN) in dual connectivity (DC) with the UE, and the second RNN is the other of the MN and the SN. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is forwarded (e.g., in block 2240) via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN. For example, the inter-base station interface can be an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
In other embodiments, the first RNN is a first CU of one of an MN and an SN in DC with the UE, and the second RNN is a second DU of the other of the MN and SN. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is forwarded (e.g., in block 2240) via an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU. For example, the inter- base station interface can be an Xn interface or an X2 interface. An example of these embodiments is illustrated by Figure 18.
In some embodiments, the exemplary method can also include operations of block 2230, where the first RNN can determine whether there is a direct inter-base station interface between the first and second RNNs. In such embodiments, the forwarding operation of block 2240 can include the operations of sub-block 2241, where the first RNN can, based on determining that there is no direct inter-base station interface between the first RNN and the second RNN, send the QoE measurement report to a core network (CN) node connected to the first RNN for forwarding to the second RNN. In some of these embodiments, the QoE measurement report is sent to the CN node (e.g., in sub-block 2241) in a request to enable modifications of resources for an established protocol data unit (PDU) session for the UE.
In some of these embodiments, the CN node is an access and mobility management function (AMF) and the QoE measurement report is forwarded to the AMF via an NG interface. An example is illustrated by Figure 19. In other of these embodiments, the CN node is a mobility management entity (MME) and the QoE measurement report is forwarded to the MME via an S 1 interface. An example is illustrated by Figure 20.
In addition, Figure 23 shows a flow diagram of another exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for handling QoE measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure. The exemplary method can be performed by a second RNN (e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, en-gNB, CU, DU, etc., or component thereof) in a wireless network (e.g., E-UTRAN, NG-RAN).
The exemplary method can include the operations of block 2310, where the second RNN can receive, from a UE via a first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell served by the second RNN. The exemplary method can also include the operations of block 2320, where the second RNN can, based on the QoE measurement report, adapt resource allocation associated with at least one of the cell and the UE. In some embodiments, adapting the resource allocation can be further based on radio link measurements, for the cell, that are received by the second RNN from UEs served by the cell. In some embodiments, the first cell uses a first RAT and one of the following applies: the second cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT, or the second cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE.
In some embodiments, the QoE measurement report also includes further application-layer QoE measurements associated with the first cell. In other embodiments, the application-layer QoE measurements are associated with the second cell and the first cell.
In some embodiments, the first RNN is a CU of a base station, the second RNN is a DU of the base station, and the QoE measurement report is received (e.g., in block 2310) via an intra base station interface between the CU and the DU. An example of these embodiments is illustrated by Figure 17. In some embodiments, the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface. In other embodiments, the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
In other embodiments, the first RNN is one of an MN or an SN in DC with the UE, and the second RNN is the other of the MN and the SN. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is received (e.g., in block 2310) via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN. For example, the inter-base station interface can be an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
In other embodiments, the first RNN is a first CU of one of an MN and an SN in DC with the UE, and the second RNN is a second DU of the other of the MN and SN. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is received (e.g., in block 2310) via an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU, and via an intra-base station interface between the second CU and the second DU. In some of these embodiments, the inter- base station interface is an Xn interface or an X2 interface. In some of these embodiments, the intra-base station interface is an FI interface or a W1 interface.
In other embodiments, there is no direct inter-base interface between the first and second RNNs. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is received (e.g., in block 2310) via a first interface between the first RNN and a first CN node and via a second interface between the second RNN and either the first CN node or a second CN node. In some of these embodiments, the first and second CN nodes are first and second AMFs, and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces. An example is illustrated by Figure 19. In other of these embodiments, the first and second CN nodes are first and second MMEs, and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces. An example is illustrated by Figure 20.
In some of these embodiments, the first and second CN nodes are the same (e.g., a single CN node, such as an AMF). In such case, the second interface is between the second RNN and the first CN node. In other of these embodiments, the first and second CN nodes are different (e.g., first and second AMFs), the second interface is between the second RNN and the second CN node, and the QoE measurement report is also received via a third interface between the first and second CN nodes.
In other embodiments, the second RNN is a CU of a base station and the QoE measurement report is received (e.g., in block 2310) by a control plane component of the CU (CU-CP). In such embodiments, adapting the resource allocation in block 2320 can include the operations of sub blocks 2321-2322. In sub-block 2321, the second RNN can extract, from the QoE measurement report, information related to one of the following associated with the UE: a PDU session, a bearer, and a data flow. In sub-block 2322, the second RNN can, based on the extracted information, send to a user plane component of the CU (CU-UP) a request to perform one or more of the following operations:
• release the bearer and/or the PDU session;
• set up a new bearer and/or a new PDU session,
• change a quality-of-service associated with the bearer or the data flow,
• change a scheduling priority of the UE, the bearer, and/or the data flow,
• change packet marking,
• temporarily disable data rate throttling, and
• temporarily ignore data volume caps associated with the UE’s subscription.
In addition, Figure 33 shows a flow diagram of another exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for handling QoE measurements by UEs in a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure. The exemplary method can be performed by aCN node (e.g., MME, AMF, etc.) associated with a radio access network (RAN, e.g., E-UTRAN, NG-RAN).
The exemplary method can include the operations of block 3310, where the CN node can receive, from a UE via a first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell serving the UE. The exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3320, where the CN node can determine that the cell is served by a second RNN. The exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3340, where the CN node can, based on determining that the cell is served by the second RNN, send the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
In some embodiments, the first RNN uses a first RAT and one of the following applies: the cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT, or the cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE.
In some embodiments, determining that the cell is served by the second RNN (e.g., in block 3320) is based on one of the following associated with the QoE measurement report: an identifier of the cell, an identifier of the second RNN, or an IP address of the second RNN. In some embodiments, there is no direct inter-base interface between the first and second RNNs. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is received via a first interface between the first RNN and the CN node, and the QoE measurement report is sent via a second interface between the second RNN and the CN node. In some of these embodiments, the CN node is an AMF and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces. In other of these embodiments, the CN node is an MME and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces.
In some embodiments, the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3330, where the CN node can determine whether the second RNN is connected to at least one of the CN node and a second CN node. In such embodiments, the QoE measurement report is sent to the second RNN (e.g., in block 3340) via a third interface between the CN node and the second CN node based on determining that the second RNN is connected to the second CN node but not to the CN node. In some of these embodiments, the CN node and the second CN node are AMFs and the third interface is an N14 interface. In other of these embodiments, one of the CN node and the second CN node is an AMF, the other of the CN node and the second CN node is an MME, and the third interface is an N26 interface.
In addition, Figure 34 shows a flow diagram of an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) for performing QoE measurements in a wireless network, according to various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure. The exemplary method can be performed by a UE (e.g., wireless device, IoT device, etc.) such as described elsewhere herein.
The exemplary method can include the operation of block 3410, where the UE can, while operating in a first cell of the wireless network that uses a first RAT, initiate QoE measurements for one or more services provided by the UE application layer. The exemplary method can include the operation of block 3420, where the UE can subsequently perform one or more mobility procedures towards other cells of the wireless network. The one or more mobility operations include at least one of the following:
• handover from a cell that uses the first RAT towards another cell that uses a different RAT than the first RAT; and
• addition of connectivity via another cell served by a different network node than the first cell.
The exemplary method can include the operation of block 3480, where the UE can send, to the wireless network, one or more QoE measurement reports including QoE measurements performed by the UE in at least the first cell.
In some embodiments, the one or more mobility procedures comprise a handover from the first cell to a second cell uses the different RAT and the one or more QoE measurement reports include a single QoE measurement report sent via the second cell. In some of these embodiments, the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3450 or block 3460. In block 3450, the UE can continue the QoE measurements in the second cell; in such case, the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed in the first cell and the second cell. In block 3460, the UE can stop the QoE measurements in the second cell; in such case, the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed only in the first cell.
In other embodiments, the one or more mobility procedures comprise a first handover from the first cell to a third cell that uses the different RAT, and a second handover from the third cell to a second cell that uses the first RAT. In such embodiments, the one or more QoE measurement reports comprise a single QoE measurement report sent via the second cell. In some of these embodiments, the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3430 or block 3440. In block 3430, the UE can continue the QoE measurements in the third cell; in such case, the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed in the first cell and the third cell. In block 3440, the UE can stop the QoE measurements in the third cell; in such case, the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed only in the first cell.
In other embodiments, the one or more mobility procedures comprise addition of connectivity to the wireless network via a second cell served by a different network node than the first cell. The second cell can either use the first RAT or the different RAT. For example, the added connectivity can be via a cell of an SCG served by an SN. Upon addition of the connectivity via the second cell, communication of data for the one or more services (i.e., for which the QoE measurements are performed) is according to one of the following: via the second cell only, non overlapping portions of the data via the first and second cells, or duplicated via both the first and second cells.
In some of these embodiments, the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3450, discussed above. In such embodiments, the one or more QoE measurement reports include one of the following:
• a single QoE measurement report including the QoE measurements performed in the first and second cells and sent via the first cell;
• a single QoE measurement report including the QoE measurements performed in the first and second cells and sent via the second cell;
• first and second QoE measurement reports including the QoE measurements performed in the respective first and second cells and sent via the respective first and second cells; or
• first and second QoE measurement report sent via the respective first and second cells, each QoE measurement report including the QoE measurements performed in both the first and second cells. In other of these embodiments, the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3460, discussed above. In such embodiments, the one or more QoE measurement reports include a first QoE measurement report including measurements performed only in the first cell and sent via the first cell. In a variant, the exemplary method can also include the operations of block 3470, where the UE can restart the stopped QoE measurements in the second cell. In this variant, the one or more QoE measurement reports also include a second QoE measurement report including measurements performed only in the second cell and sent via the second cell.
Although various embodiments are described herein above in terms of methods, apparatus, devices, computer-readable medium and receivers, the person of ordinary skill will readily comprehend that such methods can be embodied by various combinations of hardware and software in various systems, communication devices, computing devices, control devices, apparatuses, non-transitory computer-readable media, etc.
For example, Figure 24 shows an exemplary wireless network in which various embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented. For simplicity, the wireless network of Figure 24 only depicts network 2406, network nodes 2460 and 2460b, and WDs 2410, 2410b, and 2410c. In practice, a wireless network can further include any additional elements suitable to support communication between wireless devices or between a wireless device and another communication device, such as a landline telephone, a service provider, or any other network node or end device. Of the illustrated components, network node 2460 and wireless device (WD) 2410 are depicted with additional detail. The wireless network can provide communication and other types of services to one or more wireless devices to facilitate the wireless devices’ access to and/or use of the services provided by, or via, the wireless network.
The wireless network can comprise and/or interface with any type of communication, telecommunication, data, cellular, and/or radio network or other similar type of system. In some embodiments, the wireless network can be configured to operate according to specific standards or other types of predefined rules or procedures. Thus, particular embodiments of the wireless network can implement communication standards, such as Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), Long Term Evolution (LTE), and/or other suitable 2G, 3G, 4G, or 5G standards; wireless local area network (WLAN) standards, such as the IEEE 802.11 standards; and/or any other appropriate wireless communication standard, such as the Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMax), Bluetooth, Z-Wave and/or ZigBee standards.
Network 2406 can comprise one or more backhaul networks, core networks, IP networks, public switched telephone networks (PSTNs), packet data networks, optical networks, wide-area networks (WANs), local area networks (LANs), wireless local area networks (WLANs), wired networks, wireless networks, metropolitan area networks, and other networks to enable communication between devices.
Network node 2460 and WD 2410 comprise various components described in more detail below. These components work together in order to provide network node and/or wireless device functionality, such as providing wireless connections in a wireless network. In different embodiments, the wireless network can comprise any number of wired or wireless networks, network nodes, base stations, controllers, wireless devices, relay stations, and/or any other components or systems that can facilitate or participate in the communication of data and/or signals whether via wired or wireless connections.
Examples of network nodes include, but are not limited to, access points (APs) (e.g., radio access points), base stations (BSs) (e.g., radio base stations, Node Bs, evolved Node Bs (eNBs) and NR NodeBs (gNBs)). Base stations can be categorized based on the amount of coverage they provide (or, stated differently, their transmit power level) and can then also be referred to as femto base stations, pico base stations, micro base stations, or macro base stations. A base station can be a relay node or a relay donor node controlling a relay. A network node can also include one or more (or all) parts of a distributed radio base station such as centralized digital units and/or remote radio units (RRUs), sometimes referred to as Remote Radio Heads (RRHs). Such remote radio units may or may not be integrated with an antenna as an antenna integrated radio. Parts of a distributed radio base station can also be referred to as nodes in a distributed antenna system (DAS).
Further examples of network nodes include multi-standard radio (MSR) equipment such as MSR BSs, network controllers such as radio network controllers (RNCs) or base station controllers (BSCs), base transceiver stations (BTSs), transmission points, transmission nodes, multi-cell/multicast coordination entities (MCEs), core network nodes (e.g, MSCs, MMEs, AMFs), O&M nodes, OSS nodes, SON nodes, positioning nodes (e.g, E-SMLCs), and/or MDTs. As another example, a network node can be a virtual network node as described in more detail below. More generally, however, network nodes can represent any suitable device (or group of devices) capable, configured, arranged, and/or operable to enable and/or provide a wireless device with access to the wireless network or to provide some service to a wireless device that has accessed the wireless network.
In Figure 24, network node 2460 includes processing circuitry 2470, device readable medium 2480, interface 2490, auxiliary equipment 2484, power source 2486, power circuitry 2487, and antenna 2462. Although network node 2460 illustrated in the example wireless network of Figure 24 can represent a device that includes the illustrated combination of hardware components, other embodiments can comprise network nodes with different combinations of components. It is to be understood that a network node comprises any suitable combination of hardware and/or software needed to perform the tasks, features, functions and methods and/or procedures disclosed herein. Moreover, while the components of network node 2460 are depicted as single boxes located within a larger box, or nested within multiple boxes, in practice, a network node can comprise multiple different physical components that make up a single illustrated component ( e.g . , device readable medium 2480 can comprise multiple separate hard drives as well as multiple RAM modules).
Similarly, network node 2460 can be composed of multiple physically separate components (e.g., a NodeB component and a RNC component, or a BTS component and a BSC component, etc.), which can each have their own respective components. In certain scenarios in which network node 2460 comprises multiple separate components (e.g., BTS and BSC components), one or more of the separate components can be shared among several network nodes. For example, a single RNC can control multiple NodeB’s. In such a scenario, each unique NodeB and RNC pair, can in some instances be considered a single separate network node. In some embodiments, network node 2460 can be configured to support multiple radio access technologies (RATs). In such embodiments, some components can be duplicated (e.g, separate device readable medium 2480 for the different RATs) and some components can be reused (e.g., the same antenna 2462 can be shared by the RATs). Network node 2460 can also include multiple sets of the various illustrated components for different wireless technologies integrated into network node 2460, such as, for example, GSM, WCDMA, LTE, NR, WiFi, or Bluetooth wireless technologies. These wireless technologies can be integrated into the same or different chip or set of chips and other components within network node 2460.
Processing circuitry 2470 can be configured to perform any determining, calculating, or similar operations (e.g., certain obtaining operations) described herein as being provided by a network node. These operations performed by processing circuitry 2470 can include processing information obtained by processing circuitry 2470 by, for example, converting the obtained information into other information, comparing the obtained information or converted information to information stored in the network node, and/or performing one or more operations based on the obtained information or converted information, and as a result of said processing making a determination.
Processing circuitry 2470 can comprise a combination of one or more of a microprocessor, controller, microcontroller, central processing unit, digital signal processor, application-specific integrated circuit, field programmable gate array, or any other suitable computing device, resource, or combination of hardware, software and/or encoded logic operable to provide various functionality of network node 2460, either alone or in conjunction with other network node 2460 components (e.g., device readable medium 2480). Such functionality can include any of the various wireless features, functions, or benefits discussed herein.
For example, processing circuitry 2470 can execute instructions stored in device readable medium 2480 or in memory within processing circuitry 2470. In some embodiments, processing circuitry 2470 can include a system on a chip (SOC). As a more specific example, instructions (also referred to as a computer program product) stored in medium 2480 can include instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry 2470, can configure network node 2460 to perform operations corresponding to various exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) described herein.
In some embodiments, processing circuitry 2470 can include one or more of radio frequency (RF) transceiver circuitry 2472 and baseband processing circuitry 2474. In some embodiments, radio frequency (RF) transceiver circuitry 2472 and baseband processing circuitry 2474 can be on separate chips (or sets of chips), boards, or units, such as radio units and digital units. In alternative embodiments, part or all of RF transceiver circuitry 2472 and baseband processing circuitry 2474 can be on the same chip or set of chips, boards, or units
In certain embodiments, some or all of the functionality described herein as being provided by a network node, base station, eNB or other such network device can be performed by processing circuitry 2470 executing instructions stored on device readable medium 2480 or memory within processing circuitry 2470. In alternative embodiments, some or all of the functionality can be provided by processing circuitry 2470 without executing instructions stored on a separate or discrete device readable medium, such as in a hard-wired manner. In any of those embodiments, whether executing instructions stored on a device readable storage medium or not, processing circuitry 2470 can be configured to perform the described functionality. The benefits provided by such functionality are not limited to processing circuitry 2470 alone or to other components of network node 2460 but are enjoyed by network node 2460 as a whole, and/or by end users and the wireless network generally.
Device readable medium 2480 can comprise any form of volatile or non-volatile computer readable memory including, without limitation, persistent storage, solid-state memory, remotely mounted memory, magnetic media, optical media, random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), mass storage media (for example, a hard disk), removable storage media (for example, a flash drive, a Compact Disk (CD) or a Digital Video Disk (DVD)), and/or any other volatile or non-volatile, non-transitory device readable and/or computer-executable memory devices that store information, data, and/or instructions that can be used by processing circuitry 2470. Device readable medium 2480 can store any suitable instructions, data or information, including a computer program, software, an application including one or more of logic, rules, code, tables, etc. and/or other instructions capable of being executed by processing circuitry 2470 and, utilized by network node 2460. Device readable medium 2480 can be used to store any calculations made by processing circuitry 2470 and/or any data received via interface 2490. In some embodiments, processing circuitry 2470 and device readable medium 2480 can be considered to be integrated.
Interface 2490 is used in the wired or wireless communication of signaling and/or data between network node 2460, network 2406, and/or WDs 2410. As illustrated, interface 2490 comprises port(s)/terminal(s) 2494 to send and receive data, for example to and from network 2406 over a wired connection. Interface 2490 also includes radio front end circuitry 2492 that can be coupled to, or in certain embodiments a part of, antenna 2462. Radio front end circuitry 2492 comprises filters 2498 and amplifiers 2496. Radio front end circuitry 2492 can be connected to antenna 2462 and processing circuitry 2470. Radio front end circuitry can be configured to condition signals communicated between antenna 2462 and processing circuitry 2470. Radio front end circuitry 2492 can receive digital data that is to be sent out to other network nodes or WDs via a wireless connection. Radio front end circuitry 2492 can convert the digital data into a radio signal having the appropriate channel and bandwidth parameters using a combination of filters 2498 and/or amplifiers 2496. The radio signal can then be transmitted via antenna 2462. Similarly, when receiving data, antenna 2462 can collect radio signals which are then converted into digital data by radio front end circuitry 2492. The digital data can be passed to processing circuitry 2470. In other embodiments, the interface can comprise different components and/or different combinations of components.
In certain alternative embodiments, network node 2460 may not include separate radio front end circuitry 2492, instead, processing circuitry 2470 can comprise radio front end circuitry and can be connected to antenna 2462 without separate radio front end circuitry 2492. Similarly, in some embodiments, all or some of RF transceiver circuitry 2472 can be considered a part of interface 2490. In still other embodiments, interface 2490 can include one or more ports or terminals 2494, radio front end circuitry 2492, and RF transceiver circuitry 2472, as part of a radio unit (not shown), and interface 2490 can communicate with baseband processing circuitry 2474, which is part of a digital unit (not shown).
Antenna 2462 can include one or more antennas, or antenna arrays, configured to send and/or receive wireless signals. Antenna 2462 can be coupled to radio front end circuitry 2490 and can be any type of antenna capable of transmitting and receiving data and/or signals wirelessly. In some embodiments, antenna 2462 can comprise one or more omni-directional, sector or panel antennas operable to transmit/receive radio signals between, for example, 2 GHz and 66 GHz. An omni-directional antenna can be used to transmit/receive radio signals in any direction, a sector antenna can be used to transmit/receive radio signals from devices within a particular area, and a panel antenna can be a line of sight antenna used to transmit/receive radio signals in a relatively straight line. In some instances, the use of more than one antenna can be referred to as MIMO. In certain embodiments, antenna 2462 can be separate from network node 2460 and can be connectable to network node 2460 through an interface or port.
Antenna 2462, interface 2490, and/or processing circuitry 2470 can be configured to perform any receiving operations and/or certain obtaining operations described herein as being performed by a network node. Any information, data and/or signals can be received from a wireless device, another network node and/or any other network equipment. Similarly, antenna 2462, interface 2490, and/or processing circuitry 2470 can be configured to perform any transmitting operations described herein as being performed by a network node. Any information, data and/or signals can be transmitted to a wireless device, another network node and/or any other network equipment.
Power circuitry 2487 can comprise, or be coupled to, power management circuitry and can be configured to supply the components of network node 2460 with power for performing the functionality described herein. Power circuitry 2487 can receive power from power source 2486. Power source 2486 and/or power circuitry 2487 can be configured to provide power to the various components of network node 2460 in a form suitable for the respective components (e.g., at a voltage and current level needed for each respective component). Power source 2486 can either be included in, or external to, power circuitry 2487 and/or network node 2460. For example, network node 2460 can be connectable to an external power source (e.g., an electricity outlet) via an input circuitry or interface such as an electrical cable, whereby the external power source supplies power to power circuitry 2487. As a further example, power source 2486 can comprise a source of power in the form of a battery or battery pack which is connected to, or integrated in, power circuitry 2487. The battery can provide backup power should the external power source fail. Other types of power sources, such as photovoltaic devices, can also be used.
Alternative embodiments of network node 2460 can include additional components beyond those shown in Figure 24 that can be responsible for providing certain aspects of the network node’s functionality, including any of the functionality described herein and/or any functionality necessary to support the subject maher described herein. For example, network node 2460 can include user interface equipment to allow and/or facilitate input of information into network node 2460 and to allow and/or facilitate output of information from network node 2460. This can allow and/or facilitate a user to perform diagnostic, maintenance, repair, and other administrative functions for network node 2460.
In some embodiments, a wireless device (WD, e.g., WD 2410) can be configured to transmit and/or receive information without direct human interaction. For instance, a WD can be designed to transmit information to a network on a predetermined schedule, when triggered by an internal or external event, or in response to requests from the network. Examples of a WD include, but are not limited to, smart phones, mobile phones, cell phones, voice over IP (VoIP) phones, wireless local loop phones, desktop computers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), wireless cameras, gaming consoles or devices, music storage devices, playback appliances, wearable devices, wireless endpoints, mobile stations, tablets, laptops, laptop-embedded equipment (LEE), laptop-mounted equipment (LME), smart devices, wireless customer-premise equipment (CPE), mobile-type communication (MTC) devices, Intemet-of-Things (IoT) devices, vehicle-mounted wireless terminal devices, etc.
A WD can support device-to-device (D2D) communication, for example by implementing a 3 GPP standard for sidebnk communication, vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), vehicle-to-infrastructure (V2I), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) and can in this case be referred to as a D2D communication device. As yet another specific example, in an Internet of Things (IoT) scenario, a WD can represent a machine or other device that performs monitoring and/or measurements and transmits the results of such monitoring and/or measurements to another WD and/or a network node. The WD can in this case be a machine-to-machine (M2M) device, which can in a 3 GPP context be referred to as an MTC device. As one particular example, the WD can be a UE implementing the 3GPP narrow band internet of things (NB-IoT) standard. Particular examples of such machines or devices are sensors, metering devices such as power meters, industrial machinery, or home or personal appliances ( e.g refrigerators, televisions, etc.) personal wearables (e.g., watches, fitness trackers, etc.). In other scenarios, a WD can represent a vehicle or other equipment that is capable of monitoring and/or reporting on its operational status or other functions associated with its operation. A WD as described above can represent the endpoint of a wireless connection, in which case the device can be referred to as a wireless terminal. Furthermore, a WD as described above can be mobile, in which case it can also be referred to as a mobile device or a mobile terminal.
As illustrated, wireless device 2410 includes antenna 2411, interface 2414, processing circuitry 2420, device readable medium 2430, user interface equipment 2432, auxiliary equipment 2434, power source 2436 and power circuitry 2437. WD 2410 can include multiple sets of one or more of the illustrated components for different wireless technologies supported by WD 2410, such as, for example, GSM, WCDMA, LTE, NR, WiFi, WiMAX, or Bluetooth wireless technologies, just to mention a few. These wireless technologies can be integrated into the same or different chips or set of chips as other components within WD 2410.
Antenna 2411 can include one or more antennas or antenna arrays, configured to send and/or receive wireless signals, and is connected to interface 2414. In certain alternative embodiments, antenna 2411 can be separate from WD 2410 and be connectable to WD 2410 through an interface or port. Antenna 2411, interface 2414, and/or processing circuitry 2420 can be configured to perform any receiving or transmitting operations described herein as being performed by a WD. Any information, data and/or signals can be received from a network node and/or another WD. In some embodiments, radio front end circuitry and/or antenna 2411 can be considered an interface.
As illustrated, interface 2414 comprises radio front end circuitry 2412 and antenna 2411. Radio front end circuitry 2412 comprise one or more filters 2418 and amplifiers 2416. Radio front end circuitry 2414 is connected to antenna 2411 and processing circuitry 2420 and can be configured to condition signals communicated between antenna 2411 and processing circuitry 2420. Radio front end circuitry 2412 can be coupled to or a part of antenna 2411. In some embodiments, WD 2410 may not include separate radio front end circuitry 2412; rather, processing circuitry 2420 can comprise radio front end circuitry and can be connected to antenna 2411. Similarly, in some embodiments, some or all of RF transceiver circuitry 2422 can be considered a part of interface 2414. Radio front end circuitry 2412 can receive digital data that is to be sent out to other network nodes or WDs via a wireless connection. Radio front end circuitry 2412 can convert the digital data into a radio signal having the appropriate channel and bandwidth parameters using a combination of filters 2418 and/or amplifiers 2416. The radio signal can then be transmitted via antenna 2411. Similarly, when receiving data, antenna 2411 can collect radio signals which are then converted into digital data by radio front end circuitry 2412. The digital data can be passed to processing circuitry 2420. In other embodiments, the interface can comprise different components and/or different combinations of components.
Processing circuitry 2420 can comprise a combination of one or more of a microprocessor, controller, microcontroller, central processing unit, digital signal processor, application-specific integrated circuit, field programmable gate array, or any other suitable computing device, resource, or combination of hardware, software, and/or encoded logic operable to provide WD 2410 functionality either alone or in combination with other WD 2410 components, such as device readable medium 2430. Such functionality can include any of the various wireless features or benefits discussed herein.
For example, processing circuitry 2420 can execute instructions stored in device readable medium 2430 or in memory within processing circuitry 2420 to provide the functionality disclosed herein. More specifically, instructions (also referred to as a computer program product) stored in medium 2430 can include instructions that, when executed by processor 2420, can configure wireless device 2410 to perform operations corresponding to various exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) described herein. As illustrated, processing circuitry 2420 includes one or more of RF transceiver circuitry 2422, baseband processing circuitry 2424, and application processing circuitry 2426. In other embodiments, the processing circuitry can comprise different components and/or different combinations of components. In certain embodiments processing circuitry 2420 of WD 2410 can comprise a SOC. In some embodiments, RF transceiver circuitry 2422, baseband processing circuitry 2424, and application processing circuitry 2426 can be on separate chips or sets of chips. In alternative embodiments, part or all of baseband processing circuitry 2424 and application processing circuitry 2426 can be combined into one chip or set of chips, and RF transceiver circuitry 2422 can be on a separate chip or set of chips. In still alternative embodiments, part or all of RF transceiver circuitry 2422 and baseband processing circuitry 2424 can be on the same chip or set of chips, and application processing circuitry 2426 can be on a separate chip or set of chips. In yet other alternative embodiments, part or all of RF transceiver circuitry 2422, baseband processing circuitry 2424, and application processing circuitry 2426 can be combined in the same chip or set of chips. In some embodiments, RF transceiver circuitry 2422 can be a part of interface 2414. RF transceiver circuitry 2422 can condition RF signals for processing circuitry 2420.
In certain embodiments, some or all of the functionality described herein as being performed by a WD can be provided by processing circuitry 2420 executing instructions stored on device readable medium 2430, which in certain embodiments can be a computer-readable storage medium. In alternative embodiments, some or all of the functionality can be provided by processing circuitry 2420 without executing instructions stored on a separate or discrete device readable storage medium, such as in a hard-wired manner. In any of those particular embodiments, whether executing instructions stored on a device readable storage medium or not, processing circuitry 2420 can be configured to perform the described functionality. The benefits provided by such functionality are not limited to processing circuitry 2420 alone or to other components of WD 2410, but are enjoyed by WD 2410 as a whole, and/or by end users and the wireless network generally.
Processing circuitry 2420 can be configured to perform any determining, calculating, or similar operations (e.g., certain obtaining operations) described herein as being performed by a WD. These operations, as performed by processing circuitry 2420, can include processing information obtained by processing circuitry 2420 by, for example, converting the obtained information into other information, comparing the obtained information or converted information to information stored by WD 2410, and/or performing one or more operations based on the obtained information or converted information, and as a result of said processing making a determination. Device readable medium 2430 can be operable to store a computer program, software, an application including one or more of logic, rules, code, tables, etc. and/or other instructions capable of being executed by processing circuitry 2420. Device readable medium 2430 can include computer memory ( e.g . , Random Access Memory (RAM) or Read Only Memory (ROM)), mass storage media (e.g., a hard disk), removable storage media (e.g, a Compact Disk (CD) or a Digital Video Disk (DVD)), and/or any other volatile or non-volatile, non-transitory device readable and/or computer executable memory devices that store information, data, and/or instructions that can be used by processing circuitry 2420. In some embodiments, processing circuitry 2420 and device readable medium 2430 can be considered to be integrated.
User interface equipment 2432 can include components that allow and/or facilitate a human user to interact with WD 2410. Such interaction can be of many forms, such as visual, audial, tactile, etc. User interface equipment 2432 can be operable to produce output to the user and to allow and/or facilitate the user to provide input to WD 2410. The type of interaction can vary depending on the type of user interface equipment 2432 installed in WD 2410. For example, if WD 2410 is a smart phone, the interaction can be via a touch screen; if WD 2410 is a smart meter, the interaction can be through a screen that provides usage (e.g, the number of gallons used) or a speaker that provides an audible alert (e.g., if smoke is detected). User interface equipment 2432 can include input interfaces, devices and circuits, and output interfaces, devices and circuits. User interface equipment 2432 can be configured to allow and/or facilitate input of information into WD 2410 and is connected to processing circuitry 2420 to allow and/or facilitate processing circuitry 2420 to process the input information. User interface equipment 2432 can include, for example, a microphone, a proximity or other sensor, keys/buttons, a touch display, one or more cameras, a USB port, or other input circuitry. User interface equipment 2432 is also configured to allow and/or facilitate output of information from WD 2410, and to allow and/or facilitate processing circuitry 2420 to output information from WD 2410. User interface equipment 2432 can include, for example, a speaker, a display, vibrating circuitry, a USB port, a headphone interface, or other output circuitry. Using one or more input and output interfaces, devices, and circuits, of user interface equipment 2432, WD 2410 can communicate with end users and/or the wireless network and allow and/or facilitate them to benefit from the functionality described herein.
Auxiliary equipment 2434 is operable to provide more specific functionality which may not be generally performed by WDs. This can comprise specialized sensors for doing measurements for various purposes, interfaces for additional types of communication such as wired communications etc. The inclusion and type of components of auxiliary equipment 2434 can vary depending on the embodiment and/or scenario. Power source 2436 can, in some embodiments, be in the form of a battery or battery pack. Other types of power sources, such as an external power source (e.g., an electricity outlet), photovoltaic devices or power cells, can also be used. WD 2410 can further comprise power circuitry 2437 for delivering power from power source 2436 to the various parts of WD 2410 which need power from power source 2436 to carry out any functionality described or indicated herein. Power circuitry 2437 can in certain embodiments comprise power management circuitry. Power circuitry 2437 can additionally or alternatively be operable to receive power from an external power source; in which case WD 2410 can be connectable to the external power source (such as an electricity outlet) via input circuitry or an interface such as an electrical power cable. Power circuitry 2437 can also in certain embodiments be operable to deliver power from an external power source to power source 2436. This can be, for example, for the charging of power source 2436. Power circuitry 2437 can perform any converting or other modification to the power from power source 2436 to make it suitable for supply to the respective components of WD 2410.
Figure 25 illustrates one embodiment of a UE in accordance with various aspects described herein. As used herein, a user equipment or UE may not necessarily have a user in the sense of a human user who owns and/or operates the relevant device. Instead, a UE can represent a device that is intended for sale to, or operation by, a human user but which may not, or which may not initially, be associated with a specific human user (e.g., a smart sprinkler controller). Alternatively, a UE can represent a device that is not intended for sale to, or operation by, an end user but which can be associated with or operated for the benefit of a user (e.g, a smart power meter). UE 25200 can be any UE identified by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), including a NB-IoT UE, a machine type communication (MTC) UE, and/or an enhanced MTC (eMTC) UE. UE 2500, as illustrated in Figure 25, is one example of a WD configured for communication in accordance with one or more communication standards promulgated by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), such as 3GPP’s GSM, UMTS, LTE, and/or 5G standards. As mentioned previously, the term WD and UE can be used interchangeable. Accordingly, although Figure 25 is a UE, the components discussed herein are equally applicable to a WD, and vice-versa.
In Figure 25, UE 2500 includes processing circuitry 2501 that is operatively coupled to input/output interface 2505, radio frequency (RF) interface 2509, network connection interface 2511, memory 2515 including random access memory (RAM) 2517, read-only memory (ROM) 2519, and storage medium 2521 or the like, communication subsystem 2531, power source 2533, and/or any other component, or any combination thereof. Storage medium 2521 includes operating system 2523, application program 2525, and data 2527. In other embodiments, storage medium 2521 can include other similar types of information. Certain UEs can utilize all of the components shown in Figure 25, or only a subset of the components. The level of integration between the components can vary from one UE to another UE. Further, certain UEs can contain multiple instances of a component, such as multiple processors, memories, transceivers, transmitters, receivers, etc.
In Figure 25, processing circuitry 2501 can be configured to process computer instructions and data. Processing circuitry 2501 can be configured to implement any sequential state machine operative to execute machine instructions stored as machine-readable computer programs in the memory, such as one or more hardware-implemented state machines (e.g., in discrete logic, FPGA, ASIC, etc.); programmable logic together with appropriate firmware; one or more stored program, general-purpose processors, such as a microprocessor or Digital Signal Processor (DSP), together with appropriate software; or any combination of the above. For example, the processing circuitry 2501 can include two central processing units (CPUs). Data can be information in a form suitable for use by a computer.
In the depicted embodiment, input/output interface 2505 can be configured to provide a communication interface to an input device, output device, or input and output device. UE 2500 can be configured to use an output device via input/output interface 2505. An output device can use the same type of interface port as an input device. For example, a USB port can be used to provide input to and output from UE 2500. The output device can be a speaker, a sound card, a video card, a display, a monitor, a printer, an actuator, an emitter, a smartcard, another output device, or any combination thereof. UE 2500 can be configured to use an input device via input/output interface 2505 to allow and/or facilitate a user to capture information into UE 2500. The input device can include a touch-sensitive or presence-sensitive display, a camera (e.g., a digital camera, a digital video camera, a web camera, etc.), a microphone, a sensor, a mouse, a trackball, a directional pad, a trackpad, a scroll wheel, a smartcard, and the like. The presence- sensitive display can include a capacitive or resistive touch sensor to sense input from a user. A sensor can be, for instance, an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a tilt sensor, a force sensor, a magnetometer, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor, another like sensor, or any combination thereof. For example, the input device can be an accelerometer, a magnetometer, a digital camera, a microphone, and an optical sensor.
In Figure 25, RF interface 2509 can be configured to provide a communication interface to RF components such as a transmitter, a receiver, and an antenna. Network connection interface 2511 can be configured to provide a communication interface to network 2543a. Network 2543a can encompass wired and/or wireless networks such as a local-area network (LAN), a wide-area network (WAN), a computer network, a wireless network, a telecommunications network, another like network or any combination thereof. For example, network 2543a can comprise a Wi-Fi network. Network connection interface 2511 can be configured to include a receiver and a transmitter interface used to communicate with one or more other devices over a communication network according to one or more communication protocols, such as Ethernet, TCP/IP, SONET, ATM, or the like. Network connection interface 2511 can implement receiver and transmitter functionality appropriate to the communication network links (e.g., optical, electrical, and the like). The transmitter and receiver functions can share circuit components, software or firmware, or alternatively can be implemented separately.
RAM 2517 can be configured to interface via bus 2502 to processing circuitry 2501 to provide storage or caching of data or computer instructions during the execution of software programs such as the operating system, application programs, and device drivers. ROM 2519 can be configured to provide computer instructions or data to processing circuitry 2501. For example, ROM 2519 can be configured to store invariant low-level system code or data for basic system functions such as basic input and output (I/O), startup, or reception of keystrokes from a keyboard that are stored in a non-volatile memory. Storage medium 2521 can be configured to include memory such as RAM, ROM, programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), magnetic disks, optical disks, floppy disks, hard disks, removable cartridges, or flash drives.
In one example, storage medium 2521 can be configured to include operating system 2523; application program 2525 such as a web browser application, a widget or gadget engine or another application; and data file 2527. Storage medium 2521 can store, for use by UE 2500, any of a variety of various operating systems or combinations of operating systems. For example, application program 2525 can include executable program instructions (also referred to as a computer program product) that, when executed by processor 2501, can configure UE 2500 to perform operations corresponding to various exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) described herein.
Storage medium 2521 can be configured to include a number of physical drive units, such as redundant array of independent disks (RAID), floppy disk drive, flash memory, USB flash drive, external hard disk drive, thumb drive, pen drive, key drive, high-density digital versatile disc (HD-DVD) optical disc drive, internal hard disk drive, Blu-Ray optical disc drive, holographic digital data storage (HDDS) optical disc drive, external mini-dual in-line memory module (DIMM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM), external micro- DIMM SDRAM, smartcard memory such as a subscriber identity module or a removable user identity (SIM/RUIM) module, other memory, or any combination thereof. Storage medium 2521 can allow and/or facilitate UE 2500 to access computer-executable instructions, application programs or the like, stored on transitory or non-transitory memory media, to off-load data, or to upload data. An article of manufacture, such as one utilizing a communication system can be tangibly embodied in storage medium 2521, which can comprise a device readable medium.
In Figure 25, processing circuitry 2501 can be configured to communicate with network 2543b using communication subsystem 2531. Network 2543a and network 2543b can be the same network or networks or different network or networks. Communication subsystem 2531 can be configured to include one or more transceivers used to communicate with network 2543b. For example, communication subsystem 2531 can be configured to include one or more transceivers used to communicate with one or more remote transceivers of another device capable of wireless communication such as another WD, UE, or base station of a radio access network (RAN) according to one or more communication protocols, such as IEEE 802.25, CDMA, WCDMA, GSM, LTE, UTRAN, WiMax, or the like. Each transceiver can include transmitter 2533 and/or receiver 2535 to implement transmitter or receiver functionality, respectively, appropriate to the RAN links (e.g., frequency allocations and the like). Further, transmitter 2533 and receiver 2535 of each transceiver can share circuit components, software or firmware, or alternatively can be implemented separately.
In the illustrated embodiment, the communication functions of communication subsystem 2531 can include data communication, voice communication, multimedia communication, short- range communications such as Bluetooth, near-field communication, location-based communication such as the use of the global positioning system (GPS) to determine a location, another like communication function, or any combination thereof. For example, communication subsystem 2531 can include cellular communication, Wi-Fi communication, Bluetooth communication, and GPS communication. Network 2543b can encompass wired and/or wireless networks such as a local-area network (LAN), a wide-area network (WAN), a computer network, a wireless network, a telecommunications network, another like network or any combination thereof. For example, network 2543b can be a cellular network, a Wi-Fi network, and/or a near- field network. Power source 2513 can be configured to provide alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) power to components of UE 2500.
The features, benefits and/or functions described herein can be implemented in one of the components of UE 2500 or partitioned across multiple components of UE 2500. Further, the features, benefits, and/or functions described herein can be implemented in any combination of hardware, software or firmware. In one example, communication subsystem 2531 can be configured to include any of the components described herein. Further, processing circuitry 2501 can be configured to communicate with any of such components over bus 2502. In another example, any of such components can be represented by program instructions stored in memory that when executed by processing circuitry 2501 perform the corresponding functions described herein. In another example, the functionality of any of such components can be partitioned between processing circuitry 2501 and communication subsystem 2531. In another example, the non-computationally intensive functions of any of such components can be implemented in software or firmware and the computationally intensive functions can be implemented in hardware.
Figure 26 is a schematic block diagram illustrating a virtualization environment 2600 in which functions implemented by some embodiments can be virtualized. In the present context, virtualizing means creating virtual versions of apparatuses or devices which can include virtualizing hardware platforms, storage devices and networking resources. As used herein, virtualization can be applied to a node ( e.g . , a virtualized base station or a virtualized radio access node) or to a device (e.g., a UE, a wireless device or any other type of communication device) or components thereof and relates to an implementation in which at least a portion of the functionality is implemented as one or more virtual components (e.g., via one or more applications, components, functions, virtual machines or containers executing on one or more physical processing nodes in one or more networks).
In some embodiments, some or all of the functions described herein can be implemented as virtual components executed by one or more virtual machines implemented in one or more virtual environments 2600 hosted by one or more of hardware nodes 2630. Further, in embodiments in which the virtual node is not a radio access node or does not require radio connectivity (e.g., a core network node), then the network node can be entirely virtualized.
The functions can be implemented by one or more applications 2620 (which can alternatively be called software instances, virtual appliances, network functions, virtual nodes, virtual network functions, etc.) operative to implement some of the features, functions, and/or benefits of some of the embodiments disclosed herein. Applications 2620 are run in virtualization environment 2600 which provides hardware 2630 comprising processing circuitry 2660 and memory 2690. Memory 2690 contains instructions 2695 executable by processing circuitry 2660 whereby application 2620 is operative to provide one or more of the features, benefits, and/or functions disclosed herein.
Virtualization environment 2600 can include general-purpose or special-purpose network hardware devices (or nodes) 2630 comprising a set of one or more processors or processing circuitry 2660, which can be commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) processors, dedicated Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), or any other type of processing circuitry including digital or analog hardware components or special purpose processors. Each hardware device can comprise memory 2690-1 which can be non-persistent memory for temporarily storing instructions 2695 or software executed by processing circuitry 2660. For example, instructions 2695 can include program instructions (also referred to as a computer program product) that, when executed by processing circuitry 2660, can configure hardware node 2620 to perform operations corresponding to various exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) described herein. Such operations can also be attributed to virtual node(s) 2620 that is/are hosted by hardware node 2630.
Each hardware device can comprise one or more network interface controllers (NICs) 2670, also known as network interface cards, which include physical network interface 2680. Each hardware device can also include non-transitory, persistent, machine-readable storage media 2690-2 having stored therein software 2695 and/or instructions executable by processing circuitry 2660. Software 2695 can include any type of software including software for instantiating one or more virtualization layers 2650 (also referred to as hypervisors), software to execute virtual machines 2640 as well as software allowing it to execute functions, features and/or benefits described in relation with some embodiments described herein.
Virtual machines 2640, comprise virtual processing, virtual memory, virtual networking or interface and virtual storage, and can be run by a corresponding virtualization layer 2650 or hypervisor. Different embodiments of the instance of virtual appliance 2620 can be implemented on one or more of virtual machines 2640, and the implementations can be made in different ways.
During operation, processing circuitry 2660 executes software 2695 to instantiate the hypervisor or virtualization layer 2650, which can sometimes be referred to as a virtual machine monitor (VMM). Virtualization layer 2650 can present a virtual operating platform that appears like networking hardware to virtual machine 2640.
As shown in Figure 26, hardware 2630 can be a standalone network node with generic or specific components. Hardware 2630 can comprise antenna 26225 and can implement some functions via virtualization. Alternatively, hardware 2630 can be part of a larger cluster of hardware (e.g., such as in a data center or customer premise equipment (CPE)) where many hardware nodes work together and are managed via management and orchestration (MANO) 26100, which, among others, oversees lifecycle management of applications 2620.
Virtualization of the hardware is in some contexts referred to as network function virtualization (NFV). NFV can be used to consolidate many network equipment types onto industry standard high volume server hardware, physical switches, and physical storage, which can be located in data centers, and customer premise equipment.
In the context of NFV, virtual machine 2640 can be a software implementation of a physical machine that runs programs as if they were executing on a physical, non-virtualized machine. Each of virtual machines 2640, and that part of hardware 2630 that executes that virtual machine, be it hardware dedicated to that virtual machine and/or hardware shared by that virtual machine with others of the virtual machines 2640, forms a separate virtual network elements (VNE).
Still in the context of NFV, Virtual Network Function (VNF) is responsible for handling specific network functions that run in one or more virtual machines 2640 on top of hardware networking infrastructure 2630 and corresponds to application 2620 in Figure 26.
In some embodiments, one or more radio units 26200 that each include one or more transmitters 26220 and one or more receivers 26210 can be coupled to one or more antennas 26225. Radio units 26200 can communicate directly with hardware nodes 2630 via one or more appropriate network interfaces and can be used in combination with the virtual components to provide a virtual node with radio capabilities, such as a radio access node or a base station. Nodes arranged in this manner can also communicate with one or more UEs, such as described elsewhere herein.
In some embodiments, some signaling can be performed via control system 26230, which can alternatively be used for communication between the hardware nodes 2630 and radio units 26200.
With reference to Figure 27, in accordance with an embodiment, a communication system includes telecommunication network 2710, such as a 3GPP-type cellular network, which comprises access network 2711, such as a radio access network, and core network 2714. Access network 2711 comprises a plurality of base stations 2712a, 2712b, 2712c, such as NBs, eNBs, gNBs or other types of wireless access points, each defining a corresponding coverage area 2713a, 2713b, 2713c. Each base station 2712a, 2712b, 2712c is connectable to core network 2714 over a wired or wireless connection 2715. A first UE 2791 located in coverage area 2713c can be configured to wirelessly connect to, or be paged by, the corresponding base station 2712c. A second UE 2792 in coverage area 2713a is wirelessly connectable to the corresponding base station 2712a. While a plurality of UEs 2791, 2792 are illustrated in this example, the disclosed embodiments are equally applicable to a situation where a sole UE is in the coverage area or where a sole UE is connecting to the
Telecommunication network 2710 is itself connected to host computer 2730, which can be embodied in the hardware and/or software of a standalone server, a cloud-implemented server, a distributed server or as processing resources in a server farm. Host computer 2730 can be under the ownership or control of a service provider or can be operated by the service provider or on behalf of the service provider. Connections 2721 and 2722 between telecommunication network 2710 and host computer 2730 can extend directly from core network 2714 to host computer 2730 or can go via an optional intermediate network 2720. Intermediate network 2720 can be one of, or a combination of more than one of, a public, private or hosted network; intermediate network 2720, if any, can be a backbone network or the Internet; in particular, intermediate network 2720 can comprise two or more sub-networks (not shown).
The communication system of Figure 27 as a whole enables connectivity between the connected UEs 2791, 2792 and host computer 2730. The connectivity can be described as an over-the-top (OTT) connection 2750. Host computer 2730 and the connected UEs 2791, 2792 are configured to communicate data and/or signaling via OTT connection 2750, using access network 2711, core network 2714, any intermediate network 2720 and possible further infrastructure (not shown) as intermediaries. OTT connection 2750 can be transparent in the sense that the participating communication devices through which OTT connection 2750 passes are unaware of routing of uplink and downlink communications. For example, base station 2712 may not or need not be informed about the past routing of an incoming downlink communication with data originating from host computer 2730 to be forwarded (e.g., handed over) to a connected UE 2791. Similarly, base station 2712 need not be aware of the future routing of an outgoing uplink communication originating from the UE 2791 towards the host computer 2730.
Example implementations, in accordance with an embodiment, of the UE, base station and host computer discussed in the preceding paragraphs will now be described with reference to Figure 28. In communication system 2800, host computer 2810 comprises hardware 2815 including communication interface 2816 configured to set up and maintain a wired or wireless connection with an interface of a different communication device of communication system 2800. Host computer 2810 further comprises processing circuitry 2818, which can have storage and/or processing capabilities. In particular, processing circuitry 2818 can comprise one or more programmable processors, application-specific integrated circuits, field programmable gate arrays or combinations of these (not shown) adapted to execute instructions. Host computer 2810 further comprises software 2811, which is stored in or accessible by host computer 2810 and executable by processing circuitry 2818. Software 2811 includes host application 2812. Host application 2812 can be operable to provide a service to a remote user, such as UE 2830 connecting via OTT connection 2850 terminating at UE 2830 and host computer 2810. In providing the service to the remote user, host application 2812 can provide user data which is transmitted using OTT connection 2850.
Communication system 2800 can also include base station 2820 provided in a telecommunication system and comprising hardware 2825 enabling it to communicate with host computer 2810 and with UE 2830. Hardware 2825 can include communication interface 2826 for setting up and maintaining a wired or wireless connection with an interface of a different communication device of communication system 2800, as well as radio interface 2827 for setting up and maintaining at least wireless connection 2870 with UE 2830 located in a coverage area (not shown in Figure 28) served by base station 2820. Communication interface 2826 can be configured to facilitate connection 2860 to host computer 2810. Connection 2860 can be direct, or it can pass through a core network (not shown in Figure 28) of the telecommunication system and/or through one or more intermediate networks outside the telecommunication system. In the embodiment shown, hardware 2825 of base station 2820 can also include processing circuitry 2828, which can comprise one or more programmable processors, application-specific integrated circuits, field programmable gate arrays or combinations of these (not shown) adapted to execute instructions.
Base station 2820 also includes software 2821 stored internally or accessible via an external connection. For example, software 2821 can include program instructions (also referred to as a computer program product) that, when executed by processing circuitry 2828, can configure base station 2820 to perform operations corresponding to various exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) described herein.
Communication system 2800 can also include UE 2830 already referred to, whose hardware 2835 can include radio interface 2837 configured to set up and maintain wireless connection 2870 with a base station serving a coverage area in which UE 2830 is currently located. Hardware 2835 of UE 2830 can also include processing circuitry 2838, which can comprise one or more programmable processors, application-specific integrated circuits, field programmable gate arrays or combinations of these (not shown) adapted to execute instructions.
UE 2830 also includes software 2831, which is stored in or accessible by UE 2830 and executable by processing circuitry 2838. Software 2831 includes client application 2832. Client application 2832 can be operable to provide a service to a human or non-human user via UE 2830, with the support of host computer 2810. In host computer 2810, an executing host application 2812 can communicate with the executing client application 2832 via OTT connection 2850 terminating at UE 2830 and host computer 2810. In providing the service to the user, client application 2832 can receive request data from host application 2812 and provide user data in response to the request data. OTT connection 2850 can transfer both the request data and the user data. Client application 2832 can interact with the user to generate the user data that it provides. Software 2831 can also include program instructions (also referred to as a computer program product) that, when executed by processing circuitry 2838, can configure UE 2830 to perform operations corresponding to various exemplary methods (e.g., procedures) described herein.
As an example, host computer 2810, base station 2820 and UE 2830 illustrated in Figure 28 can be similar or identical to host computer 2730, one of base stations 2712a, 2712b, 2712c and one of UEs 2791, 2792 of Figure 27, respectively. This is to say, the inner workings of these entities can be as shown in Figure 28 and independently, the surrounding network topology can be that of Figure 27.
In Figure 28, OTT connection 2850 has been drawn abstractly to illustrate the communication between host computer 2810 and UE 2830 via base station 2820, without explicit reference to any intermediary devices and the precise routing of messages via these devices. Network infrastructure can determine the routing, which it can be configured to hide from UE
2830 or from the service provider operating host computer 2810, or both. While OTT connection 2850 is active, the network infrastructure can further take decisions by which it dynamically changes the routing (e.g., on the basis of load balancing consideration or reconfiguration of the network).
Wireless connection 2870 between UE 2830 and base station 2820 is in accordance with the teachings of the embodiments described throughout this disclosure. One or more of the various embodiments improve the performance of OTT services provided to UE 2830 using OTT connection 2850, in which wireless connection 2870 forms the last segment. More precisely, the exemplary embodiments disclosed herein can improve flexibility for the network to monitor end- to-end quality-of-service (QoS) of data flows, including their corresponding radio bearers, associated with data sessions between a user equipment (UE) and another entity, such as an OTT data application or service external to the 5G network. These and other advantages can facilitate more timely design, implementation, and deployment of 5G/NR solutions. Furthermore, such embodiments can facilitate flexible and timely control of data session QoS, which can lead to improvements in capacity, throughput, latency, etc. that are envisioned by 5G/NR and important for the growth of OTT services.
A measurement procedure can be provided for the purpose of monitoring data rate, latency and other network operational aspects on which the one or more embodiments improve. There can further be an optional network functionality for reconfiguring OTT connection 2850 between host computer 2810 and UE 2830, in response to variations in the measurement results. The measurement procedure and/or the network functionality for reconfiguring OTT connection 2850 can be implemented in software 2811 and hardware 2815 of host computer 2810 or in software
2831 and hardware 2835 of UE 2830, or both. In embodiments, sensors (not shown) can be deployed in or in association with communication devices through which OTT connection 2850 passes; the sensors can participate in the measurement procedure by supplying values of the monitored quantities exemplified above, or supplying values of other physical quantities from which software 2811, 2831 can compute or estimate the monitored quantities. The reconfiguring of OTT connection 2850 can include message format, retransmission settings, preferred routing etc:, the reconfiguring need not affect base station 2820, and it can be unknown or imperceptible to base station 2820. Such procedures and functionalities can be known and practiced in the art. In certain embodiments, measurements can involve proprietary UE signaling facilitating host computer 2810’s measurements of throughput, propagation times, latency and the like. The measurements can be implemented in that software 2811 and 2831 causes messages to be transmitted, in particular empty or ‘dummy’ messages, using OTT connection 2850 while it monitors propagation times, errors, etc.
Figure 29 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) implemented in a communication system, in accordance with various embodiments. The communication system includes a host computer, a base station and a UE which, in some exemplary embodiments, can be those described with reference to other figures herein. For simplicity of the present disclosure, only drawing references to Figure 29 will be included in this section. In step 2910, the host computer provides user data. In substep 2911 (which can be optional) of step 2910, the host computer provides the user data by executing a host application. In step 2920, the host computer initiates a transmission carrying the user data to the UE. In step 2930 (which can be optional), the base station transmits to the UE the user data which was carried in the transmission that the host computer initiated, in accordance with the teachings of the embodiments described throughout this disclosure. In step 2940 (which can also be optional), the UE executes a client application associated with the host application executed by the host computer.
Figure 30 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) implemented in a communication system, in accordance with various embodiments. The communication system includes a host computer, a base station and a UE which can be those described with reference to other figures herein. For simplicity of the present disclosure, only drawing references to Figure 30 will be included in this section. In step 3010 of the method, the host computer provides user data. In an optional substep (not shown) the host computer provides the user data by executing a host application. In step 3020, the host computer initiates a transmission carrying the user data to the UE. The transmission can pass via the base station, in accordance with the teachings of the embodiments described throughout this disclosure. In step 3030 (which can be optional), the UE receives the user data carried in the transmission.
Figure 31 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) implemented in a communication system, in accordance with various embodiments. The communication system includes a host computer, a base station and a UE which can be those described with reference to other figures herein. For simplicity of the present disclosure, only drawing references to Figure 31 will be included in this section. In step 3110 (which can be optional), the UE receives input data provided by the host computer. Additionally or alternatively, in step 3120, the UE provides user data. In substep 3121 (which can be optional) of step 3120, the UE provides the user data by executing a client application. In substep 3111 (which can be optional) of step 3110, the UE executes a client application which provides the user data in reaction to the received input data provided by the host computer. In providing the user data, the executed client application can further consider user input received from the user. Regardless of the specific manner in which the user data was provided, the UE initiates, in substep 3130 (which can be optional), transmission of the user data to the host computer. In step 3140 of the method, the host computer receives the user data transmitted from the UE, in accordance with the teachings of the embodiments described throughout this disclosure.
Figure 32 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method (e.g., procedure) implemented in a communication system, in accordance with various embodiments. The communication system includes a host computer, a base station and a UE which can be those described with reference to other figures herein. For simplicity of the present disclosure, only drawing references to Figure 32 will be included in this section. In step 3210 (which can be optional), in accordance with the teachings of the embodiments described throughout this disclosure, the base station receives user data from the UE. In step 3220 (which can be optional), the base station initiates transmission of the received user data to the host computer. In step 3230 (which can be optional), the host computer receives the user data carried in the transmission initiated by the base station.
The foregoing merely illustrates the principles of the disclosure. Various modifications and alterations to the described embodiments will be apparent to those skilled in the art in view of the teachings herein. It will thus be appreciated that those skilled in the art will be able to devise numerous systems, arrangements, and procedures that, although not explicitly shown or described herein, embody the principles of the disclosure and can be thus within the spirit and scope of the disclosure. Various exemplary embodiments can be used together with one another, as well as interchangeably therewith, as should be understood by those having ordinary skill in the art.
The term unit, as used herein, can have conventional meaning in the field of electronics, electrical devices and/or electronic devices and can include, for example, electrical and/or electronic circuitry, devices, modules, processors, memories, logic solid state and/or discrete devices, computer programs or instructions for carrying out respective tasks, procedures, computations, outputs, and/or displaying functions, and so on, as such as those that are described herein.
Any appropriate steps, methods, features, functions, or benefits disclosed herein may be performed through one or more functional units or modules of one or more virtual apparatuses. Each virtual apparatus may comprise a number of these functional units. These functional units may be implemented via processing circuitry, which may include one or more microprocessor or microcontrollers, as well as other digital hardware, which may include Digital Signal Processor (DSPs), special-purpose digital logic, and the like. The processing circuitry may be configured to execute program code stored in memory, which may include one or several types of memory such as Read Only Memory (ROM), Random Access Memory (RAM), cache memory, flash memory devices, optical storage devices, etc. Program code stored in memory includes program instructions for executing one or more telecommunications and/or data communications protocols as well as instructions for carrying out one or more of the techniques described herein. In some implementations, the processing circuitry may be used to cause the respective functional unit to perform corresponding functions according one or more embodiments of the present disclosure.
As described herein, device and/or apparatus can be represented by a semiconductor chip, a chipset, or a (hardware) module comprising such chip or chipset; this, however, does not exclude the possibility that a functionality of a device or apparatus, instead of being hardware implemented, be implemented as a software module such as a computer program or a computer program product comprising executable software code portions for execution or being run on a processor. Furthermore, functionality of a device or apparatus can be implemented by any combination of hardware and software. A device or apparatus can also be regarded as an assembly of multiple devices and/or apparatuses, whether functionally in cooperation with or independently of each other. Moreover, devices and apparatuses can be implemented in a distributed fashion throughout a system, so long as the functionality of the device or apparatus is preserved. Such and similar principles are considered as known to a skilled person.
Unless otherwise defined, all terms (including technical and scientific terms) used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this disclosure belongs. It will be further understood that terms used herein should be interpreted as having a meaning that is consistent with their meaning in the context of this specification and the relevant art and will not be interpreted in an idealized or overly formal sense unless expressly so defined herein.
In addition, certain terms used in the present disclosure, including the specification and drawings, can be used synonymously in certain instances ( e.g “data” and “information”). It should be understood, that although these terms (and/or other terms that can be synonymous to one another) can be used synonymously herein, there can be instances when such words can be intended to not be used synonymously. Further, to the extent that the prior art knowledge has not been explicitly incorporated by reference herein above, it is explicitly incorporated herein in its entirety. All publications referenced are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
The techniques and apparatus described herein include, but are not limited to, the following enumerated examples: A1. A method, for a first radio access network node (RNN) in a wireless network, for handling quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs), the method comprising: receiving, from a UE, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell serving the UE; determining that the cell is served by a second RNN; and forwarding the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
A2. The method of embodiment Al, wherein: the first RNN is a centralized unit (CU) of a base station; the second RNN is a distributed unit (DU) of the base station; and the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an intra-base station interface between the CU and the DU.
A3. The method of embodiment A2, wherein one of the following applies: the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface; or the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
A4. The method of embodiment Al, wherein: the first RNN is one of a master node (MN) or a secondary node (SN) in dual connectivity (DC) with the UE; and the second RNN is the other of the MN and the SN; and the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN.
A5. The method of embodiment A4, wherein the inter-base station interface is an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
A6. The method of any of embodiments A4-A5, wherein: the first RNN is a first centralized unit (CU) of one of the MN and SN; the second RNN is a second distributed unit (DU) of the other of the MN and SN; and the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU.
A7. The method of embodiment Al, wherein: the method further comprises determining that there is no direct interface between the first and second RNNs; and forwarding the QoE measurement report comprises sending the QoE measurement report to a core network (CN) node connected to the first RNN.
A8. The method of embodiment A7, wherein one of the following applies: the first RNN is a gNB or an ng-eNB, the CN node is an AMF, and the QoE measurement report is sent to the AMF via an NG interface; or the first RNN is an eNB or en-gNB, the CN node is an MME, and the QoE measurement report is sent to the MME via an SI interface.
Bl. A method, for a second radio access network node (RNN) in a wireless network, for handling quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs), the method comprising: receiving, from a UE via a first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell serving the UE, wherein the cell is served by the second RNN; and adapting resource allocation associated with the cell and/or the UE based on the QoE measurement report.
B2. The method of embodiment Bl, wherein adapting the resource allocation is further based on radio link measurements, for the cell, that are received by the second RNN from UEs served by the cell.
B3. The method of any of embodiments B1-B2, wherein: the first RNN is a centralized unit (CU) of a base station; the second RNN is a distributed unit (DU) of the base station; and the QoE measurement report is received via an intra-base station interface between the CU and the DU.
B4. The method of embodiment B3, wherein one of the following applies: the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface; or the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
B5. The method of any of embodiments B1-B2, wherein: the first RNN is one of a master node (MN) or a secondary node (SN) in dual connectivity (DC) with the UE; and the second RNN is the other of the MN and the SN; and the QoE measurement report is received via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN.
B6. The method of embodiment B5, wherein the inter-base station interface is an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
B7. The method of any of embodiments B5-B6, wherein: the first RNN is a first centralized unit (CU) of one of the MN and SN; the second RNN is a second distributed unit (DU) of the other of the MN and SN; and the QoE measurement report is received via: an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU; and an intra-base station interface between the second CU and the second DU.
B8. The method of embodiment B7, wherein: the inter-base station interface is an Xn interface; and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface or a W1 interface.
B9. The method of embodiment Bl, wherein: there is no direct interface between the first and second RNNs; and the QoE measurement report is received via: a first interface between the first RNN and a first core network (CN) node; and a second interface between the second RNN and a second CN node.
B10. The method of embodiment B9, wherein one of the following applies: the second RNN is a gNB or an ng-eNB, the first and second CN nodes are first and second AMFs, and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces; or the second RNN is an eNB or en-gNB, the first and second CN nodes are first and second MMEs, and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces.
Bll. The method of any of embodiments B9-B10, wherein one of the following applies: the first and second CN nodes are the same; or the first and second CN nodes are different, and the QoE measurement report is also received via a third interface between the first and second CN nodes.
B12. The method of any of embodiments B1-B12, wherein: the second RNN is a centralized unit (CU) of a base station; the QoE measurement report is received by a CU control plane component (CU-CP); adapting resource allocation in the cell comprises the following CU-CP operations: extracting, from the QoE measurement report, information related to one of the following associated with the UE: a PDU session, a bearer, and a data flow; and based on the extracted information, sending, to a user plane component of the CU (CU-UP), a request to perform one or more of the following: release the bearer and/or the PDU session, set up a new bearer and/or a new PDU session, change a QoS associated with the bearer or the data flow, change a scheduling priority of the UE, the bearer, and/or the data flow, change packet marking, temporarily disable data rate throttling, and temporarily ignore data volume caps associated with the UE’s subscription.
Cl. A method, for a core network (CN) node, for handling quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, the method comprising: receiving, from a UE via a first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell serving the UE; determining that the cell is served by a second RNN; and based on determining that the cell is served by the second RNN, sending the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
C2. The method of embodiment Cl, wherein determining that the cell is served by the second RNN is based on one of the following associated with the QoE measurement report: an identifier of the cell, an identifier of the second RNN, or an IP address of the second RNN.
C3. The method of any of embodiments C1-C2, wherein: there is no direct interface between the first and second RNNs; the QoE measurement report is received via a first interface between the first RNN and the CN node; and the QoE measurement report is sent via a second interface between the second RNN and the CN node.
C4. The method of embodiment C3, wherein one of the following applies: the first and second RNNs are gNBs or ng-eNBs, the CN node is an AMF, and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces; or the first and second RNNs are eNBs or en-gNBs, the CN node is an MME, and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces.
C5. The method of any of embodiments C1-C2, wherein: the method further comprises determining that the second RNN is connected to a second CN node but not to the CN node; based on determining that the second RNN is connected to the second CN node, sending the QoE measurement report to the second RNN via an interface between the CN node and the second CN node.
C6. The method of embodiment C5, wherein one of the following applies: the CN node and the second CN node are AMFs and the interface is an N14 interface; or one of the CN node and the second CN node is an AMF, the other of the CN node and the second CN node is an MME, and the interface is an N26 interface.
D1. A first radio access network node (RNN) arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, the first RNN comprising: communication interface circuitry configured to communicate with one or more UEs and with a second RNN in the wireless network; and processing circuitry operatively coupled to the communication interface circuitry, whereby the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are configured to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments A1-A8.
D2. A first radio network node (RNN) arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, the first RNN being further arranged to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments A1-A8. D3. A non-transitory, computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry of a first radio network node (RNN) arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, configure the first RNN to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments A1-A8.
D4. A computer program product comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry of a first radio network node (RNN) arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, configure the first RNN to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments Al- A8.
El. A second radio access network node (RNN) arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, the second RNN comprising: communication interface circuitry configured to communicate with one or more UEs and with a second RNN in the wireless network; and processing circuitry operatively coupled to the communication interface circuitry, whereby the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are configured to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments B1-B12.
E2. A second radio network node (RNN) arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, the second RNN being further arranged to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments B1-B12.
E3. A non-transitory, computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry of a second radio network node (RNN) arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, configure the second RNN to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments B1-B12.
E4. A computer program product comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry of a second radio network node (RNN) arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, configure the second RNN to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments B1-B12. FI. A core network (CN) node arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, the CN node comprising: communication interface circuitry configured to communicate with first and/or second radio access network nodes (RNNs) in the wireless network; and processing circuitry operatively coupled to the communication interface circuitry, whereby the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are configured to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments C1-C6.
F2. A core network (CN) node arranged to handle quality of experience (QoE) measurements by user equipment (UEs) in a wireless network, the CN node being further arranged to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments C1-C6.
F3. A non-transitory, computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry associated with a measurement function in a wireless network, configure the measurement function to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments C1-C6.
F4. A computer program product comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry associated with a measurement function in a wireless network, configure the measurement function to perform operations corresponding to the methods of any of embodiments C1-C6.

Claims

1. A method, for a first radio access network node, RNN, in a wireless network, for handling quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs, the method comprising: receiving (2210), from a UE via a first cell, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a second cell; determining (2220) that the second cell is served by a second RNN; and based on determining that the second cell is served by the second RNN, forwarding (2240) the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein: the first RNN is a centralized unit, CU, of a base station; the second RNN is a distributed unit, DU, of the base station; and the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an intra-base station interface between the CU and the DU.
3. The method of claim 2, wherein one of the following applies: the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface; or the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
4. The method of claim 1, wherein: the first RNN is one of a master node, MN, or a secondary node, SN in dual connectivity, DC, with the UE; the second RNN is the other of the MN and the SN; and the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein: the first RNN is a first centralized unit, CU, of one the following in dual connectivity, DC, with the UE: a master node, MN, or a secondary node, SN; the second RNN is a second distributed unit, DU, of the other of the MN or the SN; and the QoE measurement report is forwarded via an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU.
6. The method of any of claims 4-5, wherein the inter-base station interface is an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
7. The method of any of claims 4-6, wherein: the method further comprises determining (2230) whether there is a direct inter-base station interface between the first RNN and the second RNN; and forwarding (2240) the QoE measurement report comprises, based on determining that there is no direct inter-base station interface between the first RNN and the second RNN, sending (2241) the QoE measurement report to a core network, CN, node connected to the first RNN for forwarding to the second RNN.
8. The method of claim 7, wherein one of the following applies: the CN node is an access and mobility management function, AMF, and the QoE measurement report is forwarded to the AMF via an NG interface; or the CN node is a mobility management entity, MME, and the QoE measurement report is forwarded to the MME via an SI interface.
9. The method of any of claims 7-8, wherein the QoE measurement report is sent to the CN node in a request to enable modifications of resources for an established protocol data unit,
PDU, session for the UE.
10. The method of any of claims 1-9, wherein the first cell uses a first radio access technology, RAT, and one of the following applies: the second cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT; or the second cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE.
11. The method of any of claims 1-10, wherein one of the following applies: the QoE measurement report also includes further application-layer QoE measurements associated with the first cell; or the application-layer QoE measurements are associated with the second cell and the first cell.
12. A method, for a second radio access network node (RNN) in a wireless network, for handling quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs, the method comprising: receiving (2310), from a UE via a first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell served by the second RNN; and based on the QoE measurement report, adapting (2320) resource allocation associated with at least one of the cell and the UE.
13. The method of claim 12, wherein adapting (2320) the resource allocation is further based on radio link measurements, for the cell, that are received by the second RNN from UEs served by the cell.
14. The method of any of claims 12-13, wherein: the first RNN is a centralized unit, CU, of a base station; the second RNN is a distributed unit, DU, of the base station; and the QoE measurement report is received via an intra-base station interface between the CU and the DU.
15. The method of claim 14, wherein one of the following applies: the base station is a gNB and the intra-base station interface is an FI interface; or the base station is an ng-eNB and the intra-base station interface is a W1 interface.
16. The method of any of claims 12-13, wherein: the first RNN is a first centralized unit, CU, of one the following in dual connectivity, DC, with the UE: a master node, MN, or a secondary node, SN; the second RNN is a second distributed unit, DU, of the other of the MN or the SN; and the QoE measurement report is received via an inter-base station interface between the MN and the SN.
17. The method of any of claims 12-13, wherein: the first RNN is a first centralized unit, CU, of one of a master node, MN, or a secondary node, SN in dual connectivity, DC, with the UE; the second RNN is a second distributed unit, DU, of the other of the MN and the SN; and the QoE measurement report is received via: an inter-base station interface between the first CU and a second CU associated with the second DU; and an intra-base station interface between the second CU and the second DU.
18. The method of claim 17, wherein the intra-base station interface is an FI interface or a
W1 interface.
19. The method of any of claims 16-18, wherein the inter-base station interface is an Xn interface or an X2 interface.
20. The method of any of claims 12-13, wherein: there is no direct inter-base station interface between the first RNN and the second RNN; and the QoE measurement report is received via: a first interface between the first RNN and a first core network, CN, node; and a second interface between the second RNN and either the first CN node or a second CN node.
21. The method of claim 20, wherein one of the following applies: the first and second CN nodes are first and second access and mobility management functions, AMFs, and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces; or the first and second CN nodes are first and second mobility management entities, MMEs, and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces.
22. The method of any of claims 20-21, wherein: the second interface is between the second RNN and the second CN node; and the QoE measurement report is also received via a third interface between the first CN node and the second CN node.
23. The method of any of claims 12-13, wherein: the second RNN is a centralized unit, CU, of a base station; the QoE measurement report is received by a control plane component of the CU, CU- CP; and adapting (2320) the resource allocation comprises the following operations by the CU- CP: extracting (2321), from the QoE measurement report, information related to one of the following associated with the UE: a protocol data unit, PDU; session; a bearer; and a data flow; and based on the extracted information, sending (2322), to a user plane component of the CU, CU-UP, a request to perform one or more of the following: release the bearer and/or the PDU session, set up a new bearer and/or a new PDU session, change a quality-of-service associated with the bearer or the data flow, change a scheduling priority of the UE, the bearer, and/or the data flow, change packet marking, temporarily disable data rate throttling, and temporarily ignore data volume caps associated with the UE’s subscription.
24. The method of any of claims 12-23, wherein the first RNN uses a first radio access technology, RAT, and one of the following applies: the cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT; or the cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE.
25. A method, for a core network, CN, node, for handling quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs in a wireless network, the method comprising: receiving (3310), from a UE via a first radio access network node, RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell; determining (3320) that the cell is served by a second RNN; and based on determining that the cell is served by the second RNN, sending (3340) the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
26. The method of claim 25, wherein determining (3320) that the cell is served by the second RNN is based on one of the following associated with the QoE measurement report: an identifier of the cell, an identifier of the second RNN, or an IP address of the second RNN.
27. The method of any of claims 25-26, wherein: there is no direct inter-base station interface between the first and second RNNs; the QoE measurement report is received via a first interface between the first RNN and the CN node; and the QoE measurement report is sent via a second interface between the second RNN and the CN node.
28. The method of claim 27, wherein one of the following applies: the CN node is an access and mobility management function, AMF, and the first and second interfaces are NG interfaces; or the CN node is a mobility management entity, MME, and the first and second interfaces are SI interfaces.
29. The method of any of claims 25-26, wherein: the method further comprises determining (3330) whether the second RNN is connected to at least one of the CN node and a second CN node; and the QoE measurement report is sent to the second RNN via a third interface between the CN node and the second CN node based on determining that the second RNN is connected to the second CN node but not to the CN node.
30. The method of claim 29, wherein one of the following applies: the CN node and the second CN node are access and mobility management functions, AMFs, and the third interface is an N14 interface; or one of the CN node and the second CN node is an AMF, the other of the CN node and the second CN node is a mobility management entity, MME, and the third interface is an N26 interface.
31. The method of any of claims 25-30, wherein the first RNN uses a first radio access technology, RAT, and one of the following applies: the cell uses a second RAT; or the cell uses the first RAT and is a previous serving cell for the UE.
32. A method for performing quality of experience, QoE, measurements by a user equipment, UE, in a wireless network, the method comprising: while operating in a first cell of the wireless network that uses a first radio access technology, RAT, initiating (3410) QoE measurements for one or more services provided by the UE application layer; subsequently performing (3420) one or more mobility procedures towards other cells of the wireless network, comprising at least one of the following: handover from a cell that uses the first RAT towards another cell that uses a different RAT than the first RAT; and addition of connectivity via another cell served by a different network node than the first cell; and sending (3480), to the wireless network, one or more QoE measurement reports including QoE measurements performed by the UE in at least the first cell.
33. The method of claim 32, wherein: the one or more mobility procedures comprise a handover from the first cell to a second cell uses the different RAT; and the one or more QoE measurement reports include a single QoE measurement report sent via the second cell.
34. The method of claim 33, further comprising one of the following: continuing (3450) the QoE measurements in the second cell, wherein the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed in the first cell and the second cell; or stopping (3460) the QoE measurements in the second cell, wherein the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed only in the first cell.
35. The method of claim 32, wherein: the one or more mobility procedures comprise a first handover from the first cell to a third cell that uses the different RAT, and a second handover from the third cell to a second cell that uses the first RAT; and the one or more QoE measurement reports comprise a single QoE measurement report sent via the second cell.
36. The method of claim 35, further comprising one of the following: continuing (3430) the QoE measurements in the third cell, wherein the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed in the first cell and the third cell; or stopping (3440) the QoE measurements in the third cell, wherein the QoE measurement report includes QoE measurements performed only in the first cell.
37. The method of claim 32, wherein the one or more mobility procedures comprise addition of connectivity to the wireless network via a second cell served by a different network node than the first cell; and upon addition of the connectivity via the second cell, communication of data for the one or more services is according to one of the following: via the second cell only, non-overlapping portions of the data via the first and second cells, or duplicated via both the first and second cells.
38. The method of claim 37, further comprising continuing (3450) the QoE measurements in the second cell, wherein the one or more QoE measurement reports include one of the following: a single QoE measurement report including the QoE measurements performed in the first and second cells and sent via the first cell; a single QoE measurement report including the QoE measurements performed in the first and second cells and sent via the second cell; first and second QoE measurement reports including the QoE measurements performed in the respective first and second cells and sent via the respective first and second cells; or first and second QoE measurement report sent via the respective first and second cells, each QoE measurement report including the QoE measurements performed in both the first and second cells.
39. The method of claim 37, further comprising stopping (3460) the QoE measurements in the second cell, wherein the one or more QoE measurement reports include a first QoE measurement report including measurements performed only in the first cell and sent via the first cell.
40. The method of claim 39, further comprising restarting (3470) the stopped QoE measurements in the second cell, wherein the one or more QoE measurement reports also include a second QoE measurement report including measurements performed only in the second cell and sent via the second cell.
41. The method of any of claims 37-40, wherein one of the following applies: the second cell uses the first RAT, or the second cell uses the different RAT.
42. A first radio access network node, RNN (105, 110, 115, 500, 550, 610, 620, 710, 720, 1710, 1810, 2010, 2460, 2630, 2820) configured to handle quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs (120, 605, 705, 1610, 2410, 2500, 2830) in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), the first RNN comprising: communication interface circuitry (2490, 2670, 26200, 2826, 2827) configured to communicate with the UEs and with a second RNN (105, 110, 115, 500, 550,
610, 620, 710, 720, 1720, 1820, 1830, 2020, 2030, 2460, 2630, 2820) in the wireless network; and processing circuitry (2470, 2660, 2828) operatively coupled to the communication interface circuitry, whereby the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are configured to: receive, from a UE via a first cell, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a second cell; determine that the second cell is served by the second RNN; and based on determining that the second cell is served by the second RNN, forward the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
43. The first RNN of claim 42, wherein the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are further configured to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 2-11.
44. A first radio access network node, RNN (105, 110, 115, 500, 550, 610, 620, 710, 720, 1710, 1810, 2010, 2460, 2630, 2820) configured to handle quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs (120, 605, 705, 1610, 2410, 2500, 2830) in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), the first RNN being further configured to: receive, from a UE via a first cell, a QoE measurement report comprising application- layer QoE measurements associated with a second cell; determine that the second cell is served by a second RNN; and based on determining that the second cell is served by the second RNN, forward the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
45. The first RNN of claim 44, being further configured to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 2-11.
46. A non-transitory, computer-readable medium (2480, 2690) storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry (2470, 2660, 2828) of a first radio access network node, RNN (105, 110, 115, 500, 550, 610, 620, 710, 720, 1710, 1810, 2010, 2460, 2630, 2820) configured to handle quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs, in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), configure the first RNN to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 1-11.
47. A computer program product (2695, 2821) comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry (2470, 2660, 2828) of a first radio access network node, RNN (105, 110, 115, 500, 550, 610, 620, 710, 720, 1710, 1810, 2010, 2460, 2630, 2820) configured to handle quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs, in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), configure the first RNN to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 1-11.
48. A second radio access network node, RNN (105, 110, 115, 500, 550, 610, 620, 710, 720, 1720, 1820, 1830, 2020, 2030, 2460, 2630, 2820) configured to handle quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs (120, 605, 705, 1610, 2410, 2500, 2830) in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), the second RNN comprising: communication interface circuitry (2490, 2670, 26200, 2826, 2827) configured to communicate with the UEs and with a first RNN (105, 110, 115, 500, 550, 610, 620, 710, 720, 1710, 1810, 2010, 2460, 2630, 2820) in the wireless network; and processing circuitry (2470, 2660, 2828) operatively coupled to the communication interface circuitry, whereby the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are configured to: receive, from a UE via the first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell served by the second RNN; and based on the QoE measurement report, adapt resource allocation associated with at least one of the cell and the UE.
49. The second RNN of claim 48, wherein the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are further configured to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 13-24.
50. A second radio access network node, RNN (105, 110, 115, 500, 550, 610, 620, 710, 720, 1720, 1820, 1830, 2020, 2030, 2460, 2630, 2820) configured to handle quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs (120, 605, 705, 1610, 2410, 2500, 2830) in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), the second RNN being further configured to: receive, from a UE via the first RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application- layer QoE measurements associated with a cell served by the second RNN; and based on the QoE measurement report, adapt resource allocation associated with at least one of the cell and the UE.
51. The second RNN of claim 50, being further configured to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 13-24.
52. A non-transitory, computer-readable medium (2480, 2690) storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry (2470, 2660, 2828) of a second radio access network node, RNN (105, 110, 115, 500, 550, 610, 620, 710, 720, 1720, 1820, 1830, 2020, 2030, 2460, 2630, 2820) configured to handle quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), configure the second RNN to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 12-24.
53. A computer program product (2695, 2821) comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry (2470, 2660, 2828) of a second radio access network node, RNN (105, 110, 115, 500, 550, 610, 620, 710, 720, 1720, 1820, 1830, 2020,
2030, 2460, 2630, 2820) configured to handle quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), configure the second RNN to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 12-24.
54. A core network, CN, node (134, 138, 630, 730, 1840, 2040, 2460, 2630) configured to handle quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs (120, 605, 705, 1610, 2410, 2500, 2830) in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), the CN node comprising: communication interface circuitry (2490, 2670) configured to communicate with radio access network nodes, RNNs (105, 110, 115, 500, 550, 610, 620, 710, 720, 1710, 1720, 1810, 1820, 1830, 2010, 2020, 2030, 2460, 2630, 2820) in the wireless network; and processing circuitry (2470, 2660) operatively coupled to the communication interface circuitry, whereby the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are configured to: receive, from a UE via a first radio access network node, RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell; determine that the cell is served by a second RNN; and based on determining that the cell is served by the second RNN, send the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
55. The CN node of claim 54, wherein the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are further configured to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 26-31.
56. A core network, CN, node (134, 138, 630, 730, 1840, 2040, 2460, 2630) configured to handle quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs (120, 605, 705, 1610, 2410, 2500, 2830) in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), the CN node being further configured to: receive, from a UE via a first radio access network node, RNN, a QoE measurement report comprising application-layer QoE measurements associated with a cell; determine that the cell is served by a second RNN; and based on determining that the cell is served by the second RNN, send the QoE measurement report to the second RNN.
57. The CN node of claim 56, being further configured to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 26-31.
58. A non-transitory, computer-readable medium (2480) storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry (2470, 2660) associated with a core network, CN, node (134, 138, 630, 730, 1840, 2040, 2460, 2630) configured to handle quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs, in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), configure the CN node to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 25-31.
59. A computer program product (2690) comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry (2470, 2660) associated with a core network, CN, node (134, 138, 630, 730, 1840, 2040, 2460, 2630) configured to handle quality of experience, QoE, measurements by user equipment, UEs, in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), configure the CN node to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 25-31.
60. A user equipment, UE (120, 605, 705, 1610, 2410, 2500, 2830) configured to perform quality of experience, QoE, measurements in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), the UE comprising: communication interface circuitry (2414, 2509, 2531, 2836) configured to communicate with radio access network nodes, RNNs (105, 110, 115, 500, 550, 610, 620, 710, 720, 1810, 1820, 1830, 2010, 2020, 2030, 2460, 2630, 2820) in the wireless network; and processing circuitry (2420, 2501, 2838) operatively coupled to the communication interface circuitry, whereby the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are configured to: while operating in a first cell of the wireless network that uses a first radio access technology, RAT, initiate QoE measurements for one or more services provided by the UE application layer; subsequently perform one or more mobility procedures towards other cells of the wireless network, comprising at least one of the following: handover from a cell that uses the first RAT towards another cell that uses a different RAT than the first RAT; and addition of connectivity via another cell served by a different network node than the first cell; and send, to the wireless network, one or more QoE measurement reports including QoE measurements performed by the UE in at least the first cell.
61. The UE of claim 60, wherein the processing circuitry and the communication interface circuitry are further configured to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 33-41.
62. A user equipment, UE (120, 605, 705, 1610, 2410, 2500, 2830) configured to perform quality of experience, QoE, measurements in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), the UE being further configured to: while operating in a first cell of the wireless network that uses a first radio access technology, RAT, initiate QoE measurements for one or more services provided by the UE application layer; subsequently perform one or more mobility procedures towards other cells of the wireless network, comprising at least one of the following: handover from a cell that uses the first RAT towards another cell that uses a different RAT than the first RAT; and addition of connectivity via another cell served by a different network node than the first cell; and send, to the wireless network, one or more QoE measurement reports including QoE measurements performed by the UE in at least the first cell.
63. The UE of claim 62, being further configured to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 33-41.
64. A non-transitory, computer-readable medium (2430, 2521) storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry (2420, 2501, 2838) of a user equipment UE (120, 605, 705, 1610, 2410, 2500, 2830) configured to perform quality of experience, QoE, measurements in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), configure the UE to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 32-41.
65. A computer program product (2525, 2831) comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry (2420, 2501, 2838) of a user equipment UE (120, 605, 705, 1610, 2410, 2500, 2830) configured to perform quality of experience, QoE, measurements in a wireless network (100, 599, 699, 799), configure the UE to perform operations corresponding to any of the methods of claims 32-41.
PCT/SE2021/050587 2020-06-30 2021-06-16 Quality-of-experience (qoe) reporting for ran-based qoe management WO2022005361A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202063046203P 2020-06-30 2020-06-30
US63/046,203 2020-06-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022005361A1 true WO2022005361A1 (en) 2022-01-06

Family

ID=76624110

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/SE2021/050587 WO2022005361A1 (en) 2020-06-30 2021-06-16 Quality-of-experience (qoe) reporting for ran-based qoe management

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2022005361A1 (en)

Cited By (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114885354A (en) * 2022-06-23 2022-08-09 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 QoE measurement control method, QoE measurement control device and storage medium
WO2023135539A1 (en) * 2022-01-14 2023-07-20 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Quality of experience reporting for multicast broadcast services
WO2023146360A1 (en) * 2022-01-29 2023-08-03 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Node, user equipment and methods thereof in communication system
EP4262266A1 (en) * 2022-04-15 2023-10-18 Comcast Cable Communications LLC Configuration and reporting of quality of experience measurements
WO2023212314A1 (en) * 2022-04-29 2023-11-02 Ofinno, Llc Quality-of-experience report of measurement
WO2023225932A1 (en) * 2022-05-26 2023-11-30 Lenovo (Beijing) Limited METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SUPPORTING QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE (QoE) MEASUREMENT COLLECTION
WO2023235049A1 (en) * 2022-06-04 2023-12-07 EdgeQ, Inc. System and methods for 5g and wlan private network convergence for improved qos and qoe
WO2024006623A1 (en) * 2022-06-28 2024-01-04 Cisco Technology, Inc. Quality of experience reporting over non-access stratum (nas) signaling
WO2024006455A1 (en) * 2022-06-29 2024-01-04 Ofinno, Llc Quality of experience measurement
WO2024035303A1 (en) * 2022-08-08 2024-02-15 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Inter-node coordination for radio access network visible quality of experience reporting in dual connectivity
WO2024040364A1 (en) * 2022-08-20 2024-02-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Event triggered reporting of radio access network visible quality of experience reporting
WO2024030652A3 (en) * 2022-08-04 2024-03-14 Ofinno, Llc Quality of experience measurement
CN114885354B (en) * 2022-06-23 2024-06-04 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 QoE measurement control method, qoE measurement control device and storage medium

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019030737A1 (en) * 2017-08-11 2019-02-14 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Handling of application layer measurements during handover in wireless communication networks

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019030737A1 (en) * 2017-08-11 2019-02-14 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Handling of application layer measurements during handover in wireless communication networks

Non-Patent Citations (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
3GPP TR 38.804
3GPP TR 38.806
3GPP TS 23.501
3GPP TS 27.007
3GPP TS 36.300
3GPP TS 38.423
3GPP TS 38.463
CHINA UNICOM: "New WID: NR QoE management and optimizations for diverse services", vol. TSG RAN, no. Sitges, Spain; 20191209 - 20191212, 10 December 2019 (2019-12-10), XP051838788, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:https://ftp.3gpp.org/Meetings_3GPP_SYNC/RAN/Docs/RP-192904.zip> [retrieved on 20191210] *
ERICSSON: "NR QoE Measurement Triggering, Configuration, Collection and Reporting", vol. RAN WG2, no. Electronic meeting; 20200817 - 20200828, 6 August 2020 (2020-08-06), XP051911074, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:https://ftp.3gpp.org/tsg_ran/WG2_RL2/TSGR2_111-e/Docs/R2-2007600.zip> [retrieved on 20200806] *
HUAWEI: "Discussion on calculation of PDCP data volume in DC-Scenarios", vol. SA WG5, no. Montreal,Canada; 20190121 - 20190125, 20 January 2019 (2019-01-20), XP051596300, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Meetings%5F3GPP%5FSYNC/SA5/Docs/> [retrieved on 20190120] *
NOKIA ET AL: "NR Multi-connectivity in DU/CU architecture", vol. RAN WG2, no. Gothenburg, Sweden; 20160822 - 20160826, 21 August 2016 (2016-08-21), XP051140907, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Meetings_3GPP_SYNC/RAN2/Docs/> [retrieved on 20160821] *
QUALCOMM INC: "Support for RAN-Visible QoE", vol. RAN WG3, no. E-Meeting; 20210517 - 20210527, 7 May 2021 (2021-05-07), XP052002025, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:https://ftp.3gpp.org/tsg_ran/WG3_Iu/TSGR3_112-e/Docs/R3-211736.zip> [retrieved on 20210507] *

Cited By (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023135539A1 (en) * 2022-01-14 2023-07-20 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Quality of experience reporting for multicast broadcast services
WO2023146360A1 (en) * 2022-01-29 2023-08-03 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Node, user equipment and methods thereof in communication system
EP4262266A1 (en) * 2022-04-15 2023-10-18 Comcast Cable Communications LLC Configuration and reporting of quality of experience measurements
WO2023212314A1 (en) * 2022-04-29 2023-11-02 Ofinno, Llc Quality-of-experience report of measurement
WO2023225932A1 (en) * 2022-05-26 2023-11-30 Lenovo (Beijing) Limited METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SUPPORTING QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE (QoE) MEASUREMENT COLLECTION
WO2023235049A1 (en) * 2022-06-04 2023-12-07 EdgeQ, Inc. System and methods for 5g and wlan private network convergence for improved qos and qoe
CN114885354A (en) * 2022-06-23 2022-08-09 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 QoE measurement control method, QoE measurement control device and storage medium
CN114885354B (en) * 2022-06-23 2024-06-04 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 QoE measurement control method, qoE measurement control device and storage medium
WO2024006623A1 (en) * 2022-06-28 2024-01-04 Cisco Technology, Inc. Quality of experience reporting over non-access stratum (nas) signaling
WO2024006455A1 (en) * 2022-06-29 2024-01-04 Ofinno, Llc Quality of experience measurement
WO2024030652A3 (en) * 2022-08-04 2024-03-14 Ofinno, Llc Quality of experience measurement
WO2024035303A1 (en) * 2022-08-08 2024-02-15 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Inter-node coordination for radio access network visible quality of experience reporting in dual connectivity
WO2024040364A1 (en) * 2022-08-20 2024-02-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Event triggered reporting of radio access network visible quality of experience reporting

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022005361A1 (en) Quality-of-experience (qoe) reporting for ran-based qoe management
US20230284058A1 (en) MN-SN Coordination for Quality-of-Experience (QoE) Measurements
US11910460B2 (en) Assistance information for SPCell selection
WO2022005356A1 (en) Enhanced quality-of-experience (qoe) measurements in a wireless network
US20200053815A1 (en) Tunnel Modification for Split Bearers in Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity (MR-DC) and NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NR-DC)
US20210329723A1 (en) Inter-rat (radio access technology) re-establishment enhancements in multi-rat dual connectivity (mr-dc)
US20230231779A1 (en) Enhanced Network Control Over Quality-of-Experience (QoE) Measurement Reports by User Equipment
US20230217329A1 (en) Conditional Reconfiguration based on Data Traffic
US11523448B2 (en) Tunnel setup for split bearers in multi-rat dual connectivity (MR-DC) and NR-NR dual connectivity (NR-DC)
US20230216751A1 (en) Enhanced Quality-of-Experience (QoE) Measurements with Non-Application Layer Information
US11968588B2 (en) Techniques for conditional handover and bi-casting
US20220167451A1 (en) Methods and Apparatuses for Managing SCell State during UE Suspend/Resume
US20220408325A1 (en) Conditional Configuration in Multi-Connectivity Operation
WO2020032844A1 (en) Tunnel modification for split bearers in multi-rat dual connectivity (mr-dc) and nr-nr dual connectivity (nr-dc)
US20230262501A1 (en) Early Measurement Reporting of Suspended Secondary Cell Group (SCG)
US20210337436A1 (en) Method for inter-radio access technology handover
WO2020032846A1 (en) Pdu session information over f1 for uplink pdu session ambr traffic policing
WO2020039348A2 (en) Enhanced load balancing and power saving for base station units
US20230269646A1 (en) Dual Active Protocol Stack (DAPS) Handover During URLLC Packet Duplication
WO2022154705A1 (en) Dual-active protocol stack (daps) handover and deactivated secondary cell group (scg)
US20230388204A1 (en) Methods and Apparatuses for Reporting of Multiple Radio Link Failures
US20240080695A1 (en) User Equipment Reporting of Reconnection after Link Failure
EP4282223A1 (en) Signaling for releasing a secondary cell group (scg) configuration

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21734963

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21734963

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1